Cisco 15454-DS1-14= - 1.544Mbps Expansion Module Reference Manual Download | Manualshive

Page: 585 / 826

background image

C H A P T E R

16-1

Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual, R8.5

78-18106-01

16

SNMP

This chapter explains Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) as implemented by the
Cisco ONS 15454.

For SNMP setup information, refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide.

Chapter topics include:

•

16.1 SNMP Overview, page 16-1

•

16.2 Basic SNMP Components, page 16-2

•

16.3 SNMP External Interface Requirement, page 16-4

•

16.4 SNMP Version Support, page 16-4

•

16.5 SNMP Message Types, page 16-4

•

16.6 SNMP Management Information Bases, page 16-5

•

16.7 SNMP Trap Content, page 16-9

•

16.8 SNMP Community Names, page 16-16

•

16.9 Proxy Over Firewalls, page 16-16

•

16.10 Remote Monitoring, page 16-16

16.1 SNMP Overview

SNMP is an application-layer communication protocol that allows ONS 15454 network devices to
exchange management information among these systems and with other devices outside the network.
Through SNMP, network administrators can manage network performance, find and solve network
problems, and plan network growth. Up to 10 SNMP trap destinations and five concurrent Cisco
Transport Controller (CTC) user sessions are allowed per node.

The ONS 15454 uses SNMP for asynchronous event notification to a network management system
(NMS). Cisco ONS system SNMP implementation uses standard Internet Engineering Task Force
(IETF) management information bases (MIBs) to convey node-level inventory, fault, and performance
management information for generic DS-1, DS-3, SONET, and Ethernet read-only management. SNMP
allows a generic SNMP manager such as HP OpenView Network Node Manager (NNM) or Open
Systems Interconnection (OSI) NetExpert to be utilized for limited management functions.

The Cisco ONS 15454 supports SNMP Version 1 (SNMPv1) and SNMP Version 2c (SNMPv2c). These
versions share many features, but SNMPv2c includes additional protocol operations and 64-bit
performance monitoring support. This chapter describes both versions and gives SNMP configuration
parameters for the ONS 15454.

«
...
583
584
585
586
587
...
»

Summary of Contents for 15454-DS1-14= - 1.544Mbps Expansion Module

Page 1: ...Inc 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose CA 95134 1706 USA http www cisco com Tel 408 526 4000 800 553 NETS 6387 Fax 408 527 0883 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual Product and Documentation Release 8 5 December 2010 Text Part Number 78 18106 01 ...

Page 2: ...our equipment is causing interference by turning it off If the interference stops it was probably caused by the Cisco equipment or one of its peripheral devices If the equipment causes interference to radio or television reception try to correct the interference by using one or more of the following measures Turn the television or radio antenna until the interference stops Move the equipment to on...

Page 3: ...iew 1 2 1 2 Rack Installation 1 3 1 2 1 Reversible Mounting Bracket 1 4 1 2 2 Mounting a Single Node 1 5 1 2 3 Mounting Multiple Nodes 1 6 1 2 4 ONS 15454 Bay Assembly 1 6 1 3 Front Door 1 6 1 4 Backplane Covers 1 11 1 4 1 Lower Backplane Cover 1 12 1 4 2 Rear Cover 1 13 1 4 3 Alarm Interface Panel 1 14 1 4 4 Alarm Interface Panel Replacement 1 14 1 5 Electrical Interface Assemblies 1 15 1 5 1 EIA...

Page 4: ...nt 1 56 1 11 4 DS 1 Twisted Pair Cable Management 1 56 1 11 5 AMP Champ Cable Management 1 56 1 12 Alarm Expansion Panel 1 56 1 12 1 Wire Wrap and Pin Connections 1 57 1 13 Filler Card 1 61 1 14 Fan Tray Assembly 1 62 1 14 1 Fan Tray Units for ONS 15454 Cards 1 63 1 14 2 Fan Speed 1 65 1 14 3 Fan Failure 1 65 1 14 4 Air Filter 1 65 1 14 5 Pilot Fuse 1 66 1 15 Power and Ground Description 1 66 1 16...

Page 5: ... Level Indicators 2 15 2 4 XCVT Card 2 15 2 4 1 XCVT Functionality 2 16 2 4 2 VT Mapping 2 17 2 4 3 XCVT Hosting DS3XM 6 or DS3XM 12 2 18 2 4 4 XCVT Card Level Indicators 2 18 2 5 XC10G Card 2 19 2 5 1 XC10G Functionality 2 20 2 5 2 VT Mapping 2 21 2 5 3 XC10G Hosting DS3XM 6 or DS3XM 12 2 22 2 5 4 XC10G Card Level Indicators 2 22 2 5 5 XCVT XC10G XC VXC 10G Compatibility 2 23 2 6 XC VXC 10G Card ...

Page 6: ...VXC 10G 3 9 3 4 5 DS1 14 and DS1N 14 Card Level Indicators 3 9 3 4 6 DS1 14 and DS1N 14 Port Level Indicators 3 10 3 5 DS1 E1 56 Card 3 10 3 5 1 DS1 E1 56 Slots and Connectors 3 10 3 5 2 DS1 E1 56 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3 11 3 5 3 DS1 E1 56 Card Level Indicators 3 12 3 5 4 DS1 E1 56 Port Level Indicators 3 13 3 6 DS3 12 and DS3N 12 Cards 3 13 3 6 1 DS3 12 and DS3N 12 Slots and Connectors 3 14...

Page 7: ...rotection Modes 3 29 3 11 6 Card Features 3 29 3 11 7 DS3XM 12 Slots and Connectors 3 30 3 11 8 DS3XM 12 Faceplate and Block Diagram 3 30 3 11 9 DS3XM 12 Card Level Indicators 3 31 3 11 10 DS3XM 12 Port Level Indicators 3 32 C H A P T E R 4 Optical Cards 4 1 4 1 Optical Card Overview 4 2 4 1 1 Card Summary 4 2 4 1 2 Card Compatibility 4 4 4 2 OC3 IR 4 STM1 SH 1310 Card 4 6 4 2 1 OC3 IR 4 STM1 SH 1...

Page 8: ...11 2 OC48 LR STM16 LH AS 1550 Port Level Indicators 4 25 4 12 OC48 ELR STM16 EH 100 GHz Cards 4 25 4 12 1 OC48 ELR 100 GHz Card Level Indicators 4 27 4 12 2 OC48 ELR 100 GHz Port Level Indicators 4 27 4 13 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Cards 4 27 4 13 1 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card Level Indicators 4 29 4 13 2 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Port Level Indicators 4 29 4 14 OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 Card 4 29 4 14 1 OC192 SR STM64 IO 1...

Page 9: ...4 21 Optical Card SFPs and XFPs 4 52 4 21 1 Compatibility by Card 4 52 4 21 2 SFP Description 4 54 4 21 3 XFP Description 4 55 4 21 4 PPM Provisioning 4 56 C H A P T E R 5 Ethernet Cards 5 1 5 1 Ethernet Card Overview 5 2 5 1 1 Ethernet Cards 5 2 5 1 2 Card Compatibility 5 3 5 2 E100T 12 Card 5 4 5 2 1 Slot Compatibility 5 5 5 2 2 E100T 12 Card Level Indicators 5 5 5 2 3 E100T 12 Port Level Indica...

Page 10: ... 5 21 5 9 2 ML1000 2 Port Level Indicators 5 22 5 9 3 Cross Connect and Slot Compatibility 5 22 5 10 ML MR 10 Card 5 22 5 10 1 ML MR 10 Card Level Indicators 5 24 5 10 2 ML MR 10 Port Level Indicators 5 24 5 10 3 Cross Connect and Slot Compatibility 5 24 5 11 CE 100T 8 Card 5 25 5 11 1 CE 100T 8 Card Level Indicators 5 27 5 11 2 CE 100T 8 Port Level Indicators 5 27 5 11 3 Cross Connect and Slot Co...

Page 11: ...eatures 6 6 6 2 3 Link Integrity 6 7 6 2 4 Link Recovery 6 7 6 3 FC_MR 4 Card Application 6 7 6 4 FC_MR 4 Card GBICs 6 8 C H A P T E R 7 Card Protection 7 1 7 1 Electrical Card Protection 7 1 7 1 1 1 1 Protection 7 2 7 1 2 1 N Protection 7 3 7 1 2 1 Revertive Switching 7 4 7 1 2 2 1 N Protection Guidelines 7 4 7 2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane 7 5 7 2 1 Standard BNC Protection 7 11 ...

Page 12: ...3 Node View Tabs 8 11 8 6 2 Network View 8 12 8 6 2 1 Network View Tabs 8 13 8 6 2 2 CTC Node Colors 8 14 8 6 2 3 DCC Links 8 14 8 6 2 4 Link Consolidation 8 15 8 6 3 Card View 8 15 8 6 4 Print or Export CTC Data 8 17 8 7 Using the CTC Launcher Application to Manage Multiple ONS Nodes 8 18 8 8 TCC2 TCC2P Card Reset 8 21 8 9 TCC2 TCC2P Card Database 8 21 8 10 Software Revert 8 22 C H A P T E R 9 Se...

Page 13: ...ypes 11 9 11 2 5 Circuit Information in the Edit Circuit Window 11 10 11 3 Cross Connect Card Bandwidth 11 12 11 4 Portless Transmux 11 15 11 5 DCC Tunnels 11 16 11 5 1 Traditional DCC Tunnels 11 17 11 5 2 IP Encapsulated Tunnels 11 18 11 6 SDH Tunneling 11 18 11 7 Multiple Destinations for Unidirectional Circuits 11 18 11 8 Monitor Circuits 11 18 11 8 1 Monitor Circuits using portless ports as a ...

Page 14: ...11 19 Bridge and Roll 11 40 11 19 1 Rolls Window 11 40 11 19 2 Roll Status 11 42 11 19 3 Single and Dual Rolls 11 43 11 19 4 Two Circuit Bridge and Roll 11 45 11 19 5 Protected Circuits 11 46 11 20 Merged Circuits 11 46 11 21 Reconfigured Circuits 11 47 11 22 VLAN Management 11 47 11 23 Server Trails 11 47 11 23 1 Server Trail Protection Types 11 48 11 23 2 VCAT Circuit Routing over Server Trails ...

Page 15: ...12 41 12 12 5 Add or Remove a Node from a Topology 12 41 C H A P T E R 13 Management Network Connectivity 13 1 13 1 IP Networking Overview 13 1 13 2 IP Addressing Scenarios 13 2 13 2 1 IP Scenario 1 CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet 13 3 13 2 2 IP Scenario 2 CTC and ONS 15454 Nodes Connected to a Router 13 3 13 2 3 IP Scenario 3 Using Proxy ARP to Enable an ONS 15454 Gateway 13 4 13 2 4 IP Scenari...

Page 16: ...an OSI DCN 13 47 13 6 9 OSI IP Networking Scenarios 13 49 13 6 9 1 OSI IP Scenario 1 IP OSS IP DCN ONS GNE IP DCC and ONS ENE 13 50 13 6 9 2 OSI IP Scenario 2 IP OSS IP DCN ONS GNE OSI DCC and Other Vendor ENE 13 50 13 6 9 3 OSI IP Scenario 3 IP OSS IP DCN Other Vendor GNE OSI DCC and ONS ENE 13 52 13 6 9 4 OSI IP Scenario 4 Multiple ONS DCC Areas 13 54 13 6 9 5 OSI IP Scenario 5 GNE Without an OS...

Page 17: ...14 13 14 6 1 Alarms Suppressed for Maintenance 14 13 14 6 2 Alarms Suppressed by User Command 14 14 14 7 External Alarms and Controls 14 14 14 7 1 External Alarms 14 14 14 7 2 User Defined Alarm Types 14 15 14 7 3 External Controls 14 15 C H A P T E R 15 Performance Monitoring 15 1 15 1 Threshold Performance Monitoring 15 2 15 2 Intermediate Path Performance Monitoring 15 3 15 3 Pointer Justificat...

Page 18: ...ard Ether Ports Utilization Window 15 36 15 6 3 3 ML Series Card Ether Ports History Window 15 37 15 6 3 4 ML Series POS Ports Window 15 37 15 6 3 5 ML Series RPR Span Window 15 38 15 6 4 CE Series Ethernet Card Performance Monitoring Parameters 15 43 15 6 4 1 CE Series Card Ether Port Statistics Window 15 44 15 6 4 2 CE Series Card Ether Ports Utilization Window 15 46 15 6 4 3 CE Series Card Ethe...

Page 19: ... Creation in etherStatsTable 16 18 16 10 3 2 Get Requests and GetNext Requests 16 19 16 10 3 3 Row Deletion in etherStatsTable 16 19 16 10 3 4 64 Bit etherStatsHighCapacityTable 16 19 16 10 4 History Control RMON Group 16 19 16 10 4 1 History Control Table 16 19 16 10 4 2 Row Creation in historyControlTable 16 19 16 10 4 3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests 16 20 16 10 4 4 Row Deletion in historyCo...

Page 20: ...XCVT Card Specifications A 14 A 4 4 XC10G Card Specifications A 14 A 4 5 XC VXC 10G Card Specifications A 15 A 4 6 AIC I Card Specifications A 15 A 4 7 AEP Specifications A 16 A 5 Electrical Card Specifications A 17 A 5 1 EC1 12 Card Specifications A 17 A 5 2 DS1 14 and DS1N 14 Card Specifications A 18 A 5 3 DS1 E1 56 Card Specifications A 19 A 5 4 DS3 EC1 48 Card Specifications A 20 A 5 5 DS3 12 ...

Page 21: ... Card Specifications A 45 A 6 19 OC192SR1 STM64IO Short Reach Card Specifications A 47 A 6 20 OC192 STM64 Any Reach Card Specifications A 47 A 7 Ethernet Card Specifications A 48 A 7 1 E100T 12 Card Specifications A 48 A 7 2 E100T G Card Specifications A 49 A 7 3 E1000 2 Card Specifications A 49 A 7 4 E1000 2 G Card Specifications A 49 A 7 5 CE 1000 4 Card Specifications A 50 A 7 6 CE 100T 8 Card ...

Page 22: ... Settings C 21 C 2 3 7 DS3XM 6 Card Default Settings C 24 C 2 3 8 DS3XM 12 Card Default Settings C 26 C 2 3 9 EC1 12 Card Default Settings C 30 C 2 3 10 FC_MR 4 Card Default Settings C 32 C 2 3 11 Ethernet Card Default Settings C 33 C 2 3 12 OC 3 Card Default Settings C 34 C 2 3 13 OC3 8 Card Default Settings C 37 C 2 3 14 OC 12 Card Default Settings C 41 C 2 3 15 OC12 4 Card Default Settings C 45...

Page 23: ...1 1 Protection Schemes 1 19 Figure 1 14 BNC Insertion and Removal Tool 1 20 Figure 1 15 High Density BNC Backplane for Use in 1 N Protection Schemes 1 21 Figure 1 16 MiniBNC Backplane for Use in 1 N Protection Schemes 1 23 Figure 1 17 MiniBNC Insertion and Removal Tool 1 28 Figure 1 18 SMB EIA Backplane 1 29 Figure 1 19 AMP Champ EIA Backplane 1 30 Figure 1 20 UBIC V Slot Designations 1 33 Figure ...

Page 24: ...TCC2P Faceplate and Block Diagram 2 11 Figure 2 3 XCVT Faceplate and Block Diagram 2 16 Figure 2 4 XCVT Cross Connect Matrix 2 17 Figure 2 5 XC10G Faceplate and Block Diagram 2 20 Figure 2 6 XC10G Cross Connect Matrix 2 21 Figure 2 7 XC VXC 10G Faceplate and Block Diagram 2 24 Figure 2 8 XC VXC 10G Cross Connect Matrix 2 26 Figure 2 9 AIC I Faceplate and Block Diagram 2 29 Figure 2 10 RJ 11 Connec...

Page 25: ...Block Diagram 4 32 Figure 4 15 OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 15454 OC192LR1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4 34 Figure 4 16 Enlarged Section of the OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 15454 OC192LR1550 Faceplate 4 35 Figure 4 17 OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 15454 OC192 LR2 Faceplate and Block Diagram 4 36 Figure 4 18 Enlarged Section of the OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 15454 OC192 LR2 Faceplate 4 37 Figure 4 19 OC192 LR STM64 LH...

Page 26: ...cted Low Density Electrical Card Schemes for EIA Types 7 7 Figure 7 4 Unprotected High Density Electrical Card Schemes for EIA Types 7 8 Figure 7 5 1 1 Protection Schemes for Low Density Electrical Cards with EIA Types 7 9 Figure 7 6 1 N Protection Schemes for Low Density Electrical Cards with EIA Types 7 10 Figure 7 7 1 1 Protection Schemes for High Density Electrical Cards with UBIC or MiniBNC E...

Page 27: ...es 11 44 Figure 11 21 Single Roll from One Circuit to Another Circuit Source Changes 11 44 Figure 11 22 Dual Roll to Reroute a Link 11 45 Figure 11 23 Dual Roll to Reroute to a Different Node 11 45 Figure 12 1 Four Node Two Fiber BLSR 12 4 Figure 12 2 Four Node Two Fiber BLSR Traffic Pattern Sample 12 5 Figure 12 3 Four Node Two Fiber BLSR Traffic Pattern Following Line Break 12 6 Figure 12 4 Four...

Page 28: ...Figure 12 32 PPMN Virtual Ring 12 33 Figure 12 33 Four Shelf Node Configuration 12 34 Figure 12 34 STS Around the Ring 12 35 Figure 12 35 Unprotected Point to Point ADM to Path Protection Conversion 12 40 Figure 13 1 IP Scenario 1 CTC and ONS 15454s on Same Subnet 13 3 Figure 13 2 IP Scenario 2 CTC and ONS 15454 Nodes Connected to a Router 13 4 Figure 13 3 IP Scenario 3 Using Proxy ARP 13 5 Figure...

Page 29: ...1 Figure 13 33 OSI IP Scenario 3 IP OSS IP DCN Other Vendor GNE OSI DCC and ONS ENE 13 53 Figure 13 34 OSI IP Scenario 3 with OSI IP over CLNS Tunnel Endpoint at the GNE 13 54 Figure 13 35 OSI IP Scenario 4 Multiple ONS DCC Areas 13 55 Figure 13 36 OSI IP Scenario 5 GNE Without an OSI DCC Connection 13 56 Figure 13 37 OSI IP Scenario 6 IP OSS OSI DCN ONS GNE OSI DCC and Other Vendor ENE 13 57 Figu...

Page 30: ...re 15 15 PM Read Points on the DS3XM 6 Card 15 24 Figure 15 16 Monitored Signal Types for the DS3XM 12 Card 15 25 Figure 15 17 PM Read Points on the DS3XM 12 Card 15 26 Figure 15 18 Monitored Signal Types for the DS3 EC1 48 Card 15 27 Figure 15 19 PM Read Points on the DS3 EC1 48 Card 15 28 Figure 15 20 Monitored Signal Types for the OC 3 Cards 15 49 Figure 15 21 PM Read Points on the OC 3 Cards 1...

Page 31: ...ith Low Density Electrical Cards A Side 1 36 Table 1 12 J Labeling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configured with Low Density Electrical Cards B Side 1 36 Table 1 13 J Labeling Port Assignments for a Shelf Configured with High Density Electrical Cards A Side 1 37 Table 1 14 J Labeling Port Assignments for a Shelf Configured with High Density Electrical Cards B Side 1 37 Table 1 15 UBIC H Pr...

Page 32: ...2 Card Level Indicators 2 9 Table 2 9 TCC2 Power Level Indicators 2 10 Table 2 10 TCC2P Card Level Indicators 2 14 Table 2 11 TCC2P Network Level Indicators 2 14 Table 2 12 TCC2P Power Level Indicators 2 15 Table 2 13 VT Mapping 2 17 Table 2 14 XCVT Card Level Indicators 2 19 Table 2 15 VT Mapping 2 21 Table 2 16 XC10G Card Level Indicators 2 22 Table 2 17 VT Mapping 2 26 Table 2 18 XC VXC 10G Car...

Page 33: ...cators 4 21 Table 4 11 OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Level Indicators 4 23 Table 4 12 OC48 LR STM16 LH AS 1550 Card Level Indicators 4 25 Table 4 13 OC48 ELR STM16 EH 100 GHz Card Level Indicators 4 27 Table 4 14 OC48 ELR 200 GHz Card Level Indicators 4 29 Table 4 15 OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 Card Level Indicators 4 31 Table 4 16 OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550 Card Level Indicators 4 33 Table 4 17 OC192 LR S...

Page 34: ...dicators 5 20 Table 5 16 ML100X 8 Port Level Indicators 5 20 Table 5 17 ML1000 2 Card Level Indicators 5 22 Table 5 18 ML1000 2 Port Level Indicators 5 22 Table 5 19 ML MR 10 Card Level Indicators 5 24 Table 5 20 ML MR 10 Port Level Indicators 5 24 Table 5 21 CE 100T 8 Card Level Indicators 5 27 Table 5 22 CE 100T 8 Port Level Indicators 5 27 Table 5 23 CE 1000 4 Card Level Indicators 5 30 Table 5...

Page 35: ...efault User Idle Times 9 7 Table 9 4 Audit Trail Window Columns 9 8 Table 9 5 Shared Secret Character Groups 9 10 Table 10 1 SONET SSM Generation 1 Message Set 10 4 Table 10 2 SONET SSM Generation 2 Message Set 10 4 Table 10 3 SDH SSM Messages 10 4 Table 11 1 STS Mapping Using CTC 11 4 Table 11 2 ONS 15454 Circuit Status 11 6 Table 11 3 Circuit Protection Types 11 9 Table 11 4 Port State Color Ind...

Page 36: ...ist 13 2 Table 13 2 ONS 15454 Gateway and End NE Settings 13 15 Table 13 3 SOCKS Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules 13 17 Table 13 4 SOCKS Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules When Packet Addressed to the ONS 15454 13 18 Table 13 5 Sample Routing Table Entries 13 24 Table 13 6 Ports Used by the TCC2 TCC2P 13 25 Table 13 7 TCP IP and OSI Protocols 13 30 Table 13 8 NSAP Fields 13 32 Table 13 9 T...

Page 37: ...Table 15 15 Ethernet History Statistics per Time Interval 15 31 Table 15 16 G Series Ethernet Statistics Parameters 15 32 Table 15 17 ML Series Ether Ports PM Parameters 15 34 Table 15 18 ML Series POS Ports Parameters for HDLC Mode 15 37 Table 15 19 ML Series POS Ports Parameters for GFP F Mode 15 38 Table 15 20 ML Series RPR Span Parameters for 802 17 MIB 15 38 Table 15 21 CE Series Ether Port P...

Page 38: ...ative States B 3 Table B 4 ONS 15454 Card Service State Transitions B 3 Table B 5 ONS 15454 Port and Cross Connect Service State Transitions B 6 Table B 6 ONS 15454 Pluggable Equipment Service State Transitions B 10 Table C 1 DS 1 Card Default Settings C 4 Table C 2 DS1 E1 56 Card Default Settings C 7 Table C 3 DS 3 Card Default Settings C 13 Table C 4 DS3 EC1 48 Card Default Settings C 14 Table C...

Page 39: ...eference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Table C 19 MRC 12 Card Default Settings C 65 Table C 20 MRC 2 5G 4 Card Default Settings C 82 Table C 21 Node Default Settings C 101 Table C 22 Time Zones C 118 Table C 23 CTC Default Settings C 121 ...

Page 40: ...Tables xl Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 ...

Page 41: ...ublication and describes the conventions that convey instructions and other information This section provides the following information Document Objectives Audience Related Documentation Document Conventions Obtaining Optical Networking Information Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request Revision History Date Notes September 2007 Added this Revision History table Incorporated the ...

Page 42: ...e Security chapter Created a new table to describe the Line Rate Configurations Per 15454_MRC 4 Port Based on Available Bandwidth for 15454 MRC 4 Card matrix in Ports and Lines Rates section in Optical Cards chapter Updated the Software and Hardware Compatibility XC and XCVT Configurations table to show OC192SR1 STM64IO Short Reach OC192 STM64 Any Reach as Fully compatible for all the releases in ...

Page 43: ...for MRC 12 and MRC 4 cards in Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring Updated Server Trails section in Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels Updated the section Compatibility by Card in the chapter Optical Cards December 2008 Updated the UBIC V and UBIC H sections in Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware January 2009 Updated the sub section EIA Configurations Table 1 1 and 1 2 in Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplan...

Page 44: ...unnels Updated the table Line Rate Configurations Per 15454_MRC 12 Port Based on Available Bandwidth in the chapter Optical Cards January 2010 Updated the section OC N Speed Upgrades in the chapter SONET Topologies and Upgrades February 2010 Updated the table SFP XFP and GBIC Specifications in the appendix Hardware Specifications April 2010 Updated the section SNMP Overview in the chapter SNMP Cre...

Page 45: ...shooting procedures error messages and transient conditions Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Command Guide Provides a full TL1 command and autonomous message set including parameters AIDs conditions and modifiers for the Cisco ONS 15454 ONS 15600 ONS 15310 CL and ONS 15310 MA systems Cisco ONS SONET TL1 Reference Guide Provides general information procedures and errors for TL1 in the Cisco ONS 15454 ONS 15600 ...

Page 46: ...and keywords in body text italic Command input that is supplied by the user Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional x x x A choice of keywords represented by x appears in braces separated by vertical bars The user must select one Ctrl The control key For example where Ctrl D is written hold down the Control key while pressing the D key screen font Examples of informat...

Page 47: ...stoa huomioi sähköpiirien käsittelemiseen liittyvät riskit ja tutustu onnettomuuksien yleisiin ehkäisytapoihin Turvallisuusvaroitusten käännökset löytyvät laitteen mukana toimitettujen käännettyjen turvallisuusvaroitusten joukosta varoitusten lopussa näkyvien lausuntonumeroiden avulla SÄILYTÄ NÄMÄ OHJEET Attention IMPORTANTES INFORMATIONS DE SÉCURITÉ Ce symbole d avertissement indique un danger Vo...

Page 48: ...ão que poderá ser causadora de lesões corporais Antes de iniciar a utilização de qualquer equipamento tenha conhecimento dos perigos envolvidos no manuseio de circuitos elétricos e familiarize se com as práticas habituais de prevenção de acidentes Utilize o número da instrução fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham este dispos...

Page 49: ...xlix Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 About this Manual ...

Page 50: ... fornecido ao final de cada aviso para localizar sua tradução nos avisos de segurança traduzidos que acompanham o dispositivo GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUÇÕES Advarsel VIGTIGE SIKKERHEDSANVISNINGER Dette advarselssymbol betyder fare Du befinder dig i en situation med risiko for legemesbeskadigelse Før du begynder arbejde på udstyr skal du være opmærksom på de involverede risici der er ved elektriske kredsl...

Page 51: ...li Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 About this Manual ...

Page 52: ...o Optical Networking Product Documentation CD ROM Optical networking related documentation including Cisco ONS 15xxx product documentation is available in a CD ROM package that ships with your product The Optical Networking Product Documentation CD ROM is updated periodically and may be more current than printed documentation Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request For information...

Page 53: ...ware Card descriptions are provided in Chapter 2 Common Control Cards Chapter 3 Electrical Cards Chapter 4 Optical Cards Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards and Chapter 6 Storage Access Networking Cards To install equipment refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter topics include 1 1 Overview page 1 2 1 2 Rack Installation page 1 3 1 3 Front Door page 1 6 1 4 Backplane Covers page 1 11 1 5 Electri...

Page 54: ...quirements or specifications for a fuse and alarm panel consult the user documentation for the related equipment The front door of the ONS 15454 allows access to the shelf assembly fan tray assembly and cable management area The backplanes provide access to alarm contacts external interface contacts power terminals and BNC SMB connectors You can mount the ONS 15454 in a 19 or 23 inch rack 482 6 or...

Page 55: ...might hinder side by side installation of shelves where space is limited The ONS 15454 measures 18 25 inches 463 5 mm high 19 or 23 inches 482 6 or 584 2 mm wide depending on which way the mounting ears are attached 12 018 inches 305 2 mm deep for standard door and 13 810 inches 350 7 mm for deep door You can install up to four ONS 15454 shelves in a seven foot 2133 6 mm equipment rack The ONS 154...

Page 56: ...event loosening deterioration and electromechanical corrosion of the hardware and joined material Standard Door Front View Side View 240922 18 25 in 46 35 cm Height 19 in 48 26 cm or 23 in 58 42 cm between mounting screw holes Width 16 78 in 42 62 cm 5 015 in 12 73 cm 12 018 in 30 52 cm Depth Deep Door Front View Side View 18 25 in 46 35 cm Height 19 in 48 26 cm or 23 in 58 42 cm between mounting ...

Page 57: ...inimum of 18 5 inches 469 9 mm of vertical rack space and one additional inch 25 4 mm for air flow To ensure the mounting is secure use two to four 12 24 mounting screws for each side of the shelf assembly Figure 1 2 shows the rack mounting position for the ONS 15454 Figure 1 2 Mounting an ONS 15454 in a Rack Two people should install the shelf assembly however one person can install it using the ...

Page 58: ...and installing the ONS 15454 because it allows you to order shelf assemblies preinstalled in a seven foot 2 133 m rack The bay assembly is available in a three or four shelf configuration The three shelf configuration includes three ONS 15454 shelf assemblies a prewired fuse and alarm panel and two cable management trays The four shelf configuration includes four ONS 15454 shelf assemblies and a p...

Page 59: ...e 1 3 The ONS 15454 Front Door The ONS 15454 ships with a standard door but can also accommodate a deep door and extended fiber clips 15454 DOOR KIT to provide additional room for cabling Figure 1 4 Door lock Door button Viewholes for Critical Major and Minor alarm LEDs 33923 CISCO ONS 15454 Optical Network System ...

Page 60: ... 15454 door locks with a pinned hex key that ships with the ONS 15454 A button on the right side of the shelf assembly releases the door You can remove the front door of the ONS 15454 to provide unrestricted access to the front of the shelf assembly Before you remove the front door you have to remove the ground strap of the front door Figure 1 5 115011 ...

Page 61: ... 9 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1 3 Front Door Figure 1 5 ONS 15454 Front Door Ground Strap Figure 1 6 shows how to remove the front door 71048 ...

Page 62: ...e ONS 15454 Front Door An erasable label is pasted on the inside of the front door Figure 1 7 You can use the label to record slot assignments port assignments card types node ID rack ID and serial number for the ONS 15454 Door hinge Assembly hinge pin Assembly hinge Translucent circles for LED viewing 38831 FAN FAIL CR IT MA J MIN ...

Page 63: ...ng Figure 1 8 Figure 1 8 Laser Warning on the Front Door Label 1 4 Backplane Covers If a backplane does not have an EIA panel installed it should have two sheet metal backplane covers one on each side of the backplane as shown in Figure 1 9 on page 1 12 Each cover is held in place with nine 6 32 x 3 8 inch Phillips screws Note See the 1 5 Electrical Interface Assemblies section on page 1 15 for in...

Page 64: ...lane is covered by either a clear plastic protector 15454 SA ANSI or a sheet metal cover 15454 SA HD which is held in place by five 6 32 x 1 2 inch screws Remove the lower backplane cover to access the alarm interface panel AIP alarm pin fields frame ground and power terminals Figure 1 10 Figure 1 10 Removing the Lower Backplane Cover B A 32074 Lower Backplane Cover Backplane Sheet Metal Covers 32...

Page 65: ...ic rear cover This clear plastic cover provides additional protection for the cables and connectors on the backplane Figure 1 11 shows the rear cover screw locations Figure 1 11 Backplane Attachment for Cover You can also install the optional spacers if more space is needed between the cables and rear cover Figure 1 12 32073 Screw locations for attaching the rear cover ...

Page 66: ...in the ONS 15454 also use the MAC address to store the node database The 5 A AIP 73 7665 XX is required when installing fan tray assembly 15454 FTA3 or 15454 CC FTA which comes preinstalled on the shelf assembly 15454 SA ANSI or 15454 SA HD Note A blown fuse on the AIP board can cause the LCD display to go blank 1 4 4 Alarm Interface Panel Replacement If the alarm interface panel AIP fails a MAC F...

Page 67: ...ce Assemblies Optional EIA backplane covers are typically preinstalled when ordered with the ONS 15454 EIAs must be ordered when using DS 1 DS 3 DS3XM or EC 1 cards This section describes each EIA Six different EIA backplane covers are available for the ONS 15454 BNC High Density BNC MiniBNC SMB AMP Champ UBIC H Universal Backplane Interface Connector Horizontal and UBIC V Vertical If the shelf wa...

Page 68: ...distance available 122 feet 37 meters is less than the maximum distance available with standard RG 59 734A cable 306 feet 93 meters The maximum distance when using the RG 59 734A cable is 450 feet 137 meters The shorter maximum distance available with the RG179 is due to a higher attenuation rate for the thinner cable Attenuation rates are calculated using a DS 3 signal For RG 179 the attenuation ...

Page 69: ... Supported A Side Hosts A Side Columns Map to A Side Product Number B Side Hosts B Side Columns Map to B Side Product Number Table 1 2 EIA Configurations Compatible with the 15454 SA ANSI and the 15454 SA HD EIA Type Cards Supported A Side Hosts A Side Columns Map to A Side Product Number B Side Hosts B Side Columns Map to B Side Product Number BNC DS 3 DS3XM 6 DS3XM 12 EC 1 24 pairs of BNC connec...

Page 70: ...2 Slot 13 Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 15454 EIA 1SMBB84 AMP Cham p DS 1 6 AMP Champ connectors Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 15454 EIA 1AMPA84 6 AMP Champ connectors Slot 12 Slot 13 Slot 14 Slot 15 Slot 16 Slot 17 15454 EIA 1AMPB84 UBIC V DS 1 DS 3 EC 1 DS3XM 6 DS3XM 12 DS3 EC1 48 DS1 E1 56 8 pairs of SCSI connectors Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 15454 EIA UBICV A 8 pai...

Page 71: ...You can install an additional card in Slot 3 as a protect card for the card in Slot 4 Slots 5 and 6 do not support DS 3 cards when the standard BNC EIA panel connectors are used The EIA side marked B provides an additional 24 pairs of BNC connectors The first 12 BNC connector pairs correspond to Ports 1 to 12 for a 12 port card and map to Slot 14 on the shelf assembly The BNC connector pairs are m...

Page 72: ...e CA 91362 4047 Phone 800 982 2629 Fax 818 706 1040 1 5 4 High Density BNC EIA The ONS 15454 high density BNC EIA supports 48 DS 3 circuits on each side of the ONS 15454 48 transmit and 48 receive connectors If you install BNC EIAs on both sides of the unit the ONS 15454 hosts up to 96 circuits The high density BNC EIA supports Trompeter UCBJ224 75 ohm 4 leg connectors King or ITT are also compati...

Page 73: ... correspond to Ports 1 to 12 of a 12 port card The BNC connector pairs are marked Tx and Rx to indicate transmit and receive cables for each port The High Density BNC EIA supports both 1 1 and 1 N protection across all slots except Slots 6 and 12 1 5 5 MiniBNC EIA The ONS 15454 MiniBNC EIA supports a maximum of 192 transmit and receive DS 3 connections 96 per side A and B through 192 miniBNC conne...

Page 74: ...e diagrams adjacent to each row of connectors indicate the slots and ports that correspond with each connector in that row depending on whether you are using a high density HD or low density LD configuration The MiniBNC connector pairs are marked Tx and Rx to indicate transmit and receive cables for each port Figure 1 16 shows the ONS 15454 with preinstalled MiniBNC EIAs To install coaxial cable w...

Page 75: ...1 23 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 1 Shelf and Backplane Hardware 1 5 5 MiniBNC EIA Figure 1 16 MiniBNC Backplane for Use in 1 N Protection Schemes ...

Page 76: ... T6 T18 T30 T42 T6 T18 T30 T42 T7 T19 T31 T43 T7 T19 T31 T43 T8 T20 T32 T44 T8 T20 T32 T44 T9 T21 T33 T45 T9 T21 T33 T45 T10 T22 T34 T46 T10 T22 T34 T46 T11 T23 T35 T47 T11 T23 T35 T47 T12 T24 T36 T48 T12 T24 T36 T48 RX J12 J11 J10 J9 J13 J14 J15 J16 R1 R13 R25 R37 R1 R13 R25 R37 R2 R14 R26 R38 R2 R14 R26 R38 R3 R15 R27 R39 R3 R15 R27 R39 R4 R16 R28 R40 R4 R16 R28 R40 R5 R17 R29 R41 R5 R17 R29 R41...

Page 77: ...17 T29 T41 T6 T18 T30 T42 T6 T18 T30 T42 T7 T19 T31 T43 T7 T19 T31 T43 T8 T20 T32 T44 T8 T20 T32 T44 T9 T21 T33 T45 T9 T21 T33 T45 T10 T22 T34 T46 T10 T22 T34 T46 T11 T23 T35 T47 T11 T23 T35 T47 T12 T24 T36 T48 T12 T24 T36 T48 RX J28 J27 J26 J25 J29 J30 J31 J32 R1 R13 R25 R37 R1 R13 R25 R37 R2 R14 R26 R38 R2 R14 R26 R38 R3 R15 R27 R39 R3 R15 R27 R39 R4 R16 R28 R40 R4 R16 R28 R40 R5 R17 R29 R41 R5 ...

Page 78: ...T8 T20 T32 T44 T8 T20 T32 T44 T9 T21 T33 T45 T9 T21 T33 T45 T10 T22 T34 T46 T10 T22 T34 T46 T11 T23 T35 T47 T11 T23 T35 T47 T12 T24 T36 T48 T12 T24 T36 T48 RX J12 J11 J10 J9 J13 J14 J15 J16 R1 R13 R25 R37 R1 R13 R25 R37 R2 R14 R26 R38 R2 R14 R26 R38 R3 R15 R27 R39 R3 R15 R27 R39 R4 R16 R28 R40 R4 R16 R28 R40 R5 R17 R29 R41 R5 R17 R29 R41 R6 R18 R30 R42 R6 R18 R30 R42 R7 R19 R31 R43 R7 R19 R31 R43 ...

Page 79: ... T27 T39 T4 T16 T28 T40 T4 T16 T28 T40 T5 T17 T29 T41 T5 T17 T29 T41 T6 T18 T30 T42 T6 T18 T30 T42 T7 T19 T31 T43 T7 T19 T31 T43 T8 T20 T32 T44 T8 T20 T32 T44 T9 T21 T33 T45 T9 T21 T33 T45 T10 T22 T34 T46 T10 T22 T34 T46 T11 T23 T35 T47 T11 T23 T35 T47 T12 T24 T36 T48 T12 T24 T36 T48 RX J28 J27 J26 J25 J29 J30 J31 J32 R1 R13 R25 R37 R1 R13 R25 R37 R2 R14 R26 R38 R2 R14 R26 R38 R3 R15 R27 R39 R3 R1...

Page 80: ...54 EIA Cisco recommends these cables for connection to a patch panel they are not designed for long runs Range does not affect loopback testing You can use SMB EIAs with DS 1 DS 3 including the DS3XM 6 and DS3XM 12 and EC 1 cards If you use DS 1 cards use the DS 1 electrical interface adapter balun to terminate the twisted pair DS 1 cable to the SMB EIA see the 1 7 2 Electrical Interface Adapters ...

Page 81: ...he ONS 15454 AMP Champ EIA supports 64 pin 32 pair AMP Champ connectors for each slot on both sides of the shelf assembly where the EIA is installed Cisco AMP Champ connectors are female AMP 552246 1 with AMP 552562 2 bail locks Each AMP Champ connector supports 14 DS 1 ports You can use AMP Champ EIAs with DS 1 cards only Figure 1 19 shows the ONS 15454 with preinstalled AMP Champ EIAs and the co...

Page 82: ...ane supports 14 DS 1 ports for a DS1 14 card and each connector features 28 live pairs one transmit pair and one receive pair for each DS 1 port The EIA side marked B hosts six AMP Champ connectors The connectors are labeled 12 to 17 for the corresponding slots on the shelf assembly Each AMP Champ connector on the backplane supports 14 DS 1 ports for a DS1 14 card and each connector features 28 li...

Page 83: ...Ring 7 green violet Tx Tip 8 red green 8 40 Tx Ring 8 green red Rx Tip 8 violet brown 24 56 Rx Ring 8 brown violet Tx Tip 9 red brown 9 41 Tx Ring 9 brown red Rx Tip 9 violet slate 25 57 Rx Ring 9 slate violet Tx Tip 10 red slate 10 42 Tx Ring 10 slate red Rx Tip 10 white blue 26 58 Rx Ring 10 blue white Tx Tip 11 black blue 11 43 Tx Ring 11 blue black Rx Tip 11 white orange 27 59 Rx Ring 11 orang...

Page 84: ...slate white Tx Tip 6 red blue 6 38 Tx Ring 6 blue red Rx Tip 6 red blue 22 54 Rx Ring 6 blue red Tx Tip 7 red orange 7 39 Tx Ring 7 orange red Rx Tip 7 red orange 23 55 Rx Ring 7 orange red Tx Tip 8 red green 8 40 Tx Ring 8 green red Rx Tip 8 red green 24 56 Rx Ring 8 green red Tx Tip 9 red brown 9 41 Tx Ring 9 brown red Rx Tip 9 red brown 25 57 Rx Ring 9 brown red Tx Tip 10 red slate 10 42 Tx Rin...

Page 85: ... HD SLOT 16 HD SLOT 17 DS3 37 48 DS1 43 56 DS3 13 24 DS1 15 28 DS3 13 24 DS1 15 28 DS3 25 36 DS1 29 42 HD SLOT 16 HD SLOT 17 DS3 37 48 DS1 43 56 DS3 13 24 DS1 15 28 DS3 13 24 DS1 15 28 DS3 25 36 DS1 29 42 JACKSCREW SHOULD BE INSTALLED FIRST AND REMOVED LAST JACKSCREW SHOULD BE INSTALLED FIRST AND REMOVED LAST JACKSCREW SHOULD BE INSTALLED FIRST AND REMOVED LAST REAR COVER BRACKET LOCATION REAR COV...

Page 86: ...e slot assignments 1 5 9 UBIC H EIA UBIC H EIAs are attached to the shelf assembly backplane to provide up to 112 transmit and receive DS 1 connections through 16 SCSI connectors per side A and B or 96 transmit and receive DS 3 connections The UBIC H EIAs are designed to support DS 1 DS 3 and EC 1 signals The appropriate cable assembly is required depending on the type of signal You can install UB...

Page 87: ... Backplane Hardware 1 5 9 UBIC H EIA Figure 1 21 shows the A and B side connector labeling Figure 1 21 UBIC H EIA Connector Labeling Tables 1 11 and 1 12 show the J labeling and corresponding card ports for a shelf assembly configured with low density electrical cards 124533 ...

Page 88: ...J3 J2 J1 J5 J6 J7 J8 RX J12 J11 J10 J9 J13 J14 J15 J16 Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports Ports 1 DS 1 1 14 DS 3 1 12 2 DS 1 1 14 DS 3 1 12 3 DS 1 1 14 DS 3 1 12 4 DS 1 1 14 DS 3 1 12 5 DS 1 1 14 DS 3 1 12 6 DS 1 1 14 DS 3 1 12 Table 1 12 J Labeling Port Assignments for a Shelf Assembly Configured with Low Density Electrical Cards B Side Slot Port Type TX J20 J19 J18 J17 J21 J22 J23 24 RX J...

Page 89: ...he deep door and cabling on the backplane the ONS 15454 shelf measures approximately 16 5 inches deep when fully populated with backplane cables and 17 0 inches deep with the rear cover installed The UBIC H EIA supports the following cards DS1 14 DS1N 14 DS3 12 DS3N 12 DS3 12E DS3N 12E EC1 12 DS3XM 6 DS3XM 12 DS3 EC1 48 DS1 E1 56 Table 1 13 J Labeling Port Assignments for a Shelf Configured with H...

Page 90: ...Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower right outside edge of the shelf assembly When using ONS 15454 DS 3 electrical cables the cables must terminate on an EIA installed on the ONS 15454 backplane All DS 3 cables connected to the ONS 15454 DS 3 card must terminate with coaxial cables using the desired connector type to connect to the specified EIA The electromagnetic compa...

Page 91: ...ards in the ONS 15454 you must fit the corresponding transmit and receive SMB connectors on the EIA with a DS 1 electrical interface adapter You can install the adapter on the SMB connector for the port The adapter has wire wrap posts for DS 1 transmit and receive cables Figure 1 22 shows the DS 1 electrical interface adapter Note EIA refers to electrical interface assemblies and not electrical in...

Page 92: ...able 250 feet 15454 CADS1 ID DS 1 cable 655 feet 15454 CADS1 LD DS 3 EC 1 cables for the UBIC V have a maximum supported distance of 450 feet 137 2 m DS 3 EC 1 cables arrive with unterminated coaxial cable at the far end and labeled with the respective port number 75 ohm BNC connectors for each port qty 12 are supplied and require that they be crimped on The following DS 3 EC 1 cables are no longe...

Page 93: ...in SCSI Pin Port 1 1 26 7 FGnd 2 27 FGnd FGnd 3 28 FGnd FGnd 4 29 FGnd 2 5 30 8 FGnd 6 31 FGnd FGnd 7 32 FGnd FGnd 8 33 FGnd 3 9 34 9 FGnd 10 35 FGnd FGnd 11 36 FGnd FGnd 12 37 FGnd 4 13 38 10 FGnd 14 39 FGnd FGnd 15 40 FGnd FGnd 16 41 FGnd 5 17 42 11 FGnd 18 43 FGnd FGnd 19 44 FGnd FGnd 20 45 FGnd 6 21 46 12 FGnd 22 47 FGnd FGnd 23 48 FGnd FGnd 24 49 FGnd 13 25 50 14 ...

Page 94: ... From DSx 100Ω Differential DS 1 To From DSx Shield to connector shell Tip DS1 13 Ring DS1 13 Tip DS1 14 Ring DS1 14 100Ω Differential DS 1 To From DSx 100Ω Differential DS 1 To From DSx DS1 75Ω Port 1 DS1 75Ω Port 2 FGND FGND FGND Pin 1 Pin 5 DS1 75Ω Port 13 Pin 25 Pin 2 FGnd Pin 3 FGnd Pin 4 FGnd 75Ω Signal To From UBIC V 75Ω Signal To From UBIC V 75Ω Signal To From UBIC V FGND DS1 75Ω Port 14 P...

Page 95: ...DS 1 5 Ring DS 1 5 Slate white Red blue Tip DS 1 6 Ring DS 1 6 Blue red Red orange Tip DS 1 7 Ring DS 1 7 Orange red Red green Tip DS 1 8 Ring DS 1 8 Green red Red brown Tip DS 1 9 Ring DS 1 9 Brown red Red slate Tip DS 1 10 Ring DS 1 10 Slate red Black blue Tip DS 1 11 Ring DS 1 11 Blue black Black orange Tip DS 1 12 Ring DS 1 12 Orange black Black green Tip DS 1 13 Ring DS 1 13 Green black Black...

Page 96: ...bles Figure 1 25 shows the UBIC V DS 3 EC 1 cable schematic diagram 5 17 42 11 FGnd 18 43 FGnd FGnd 19 44 FGnd FGnd 20 45 FGnd 6 21 46 12 FGnd 22 47 FGnd FGnd 23 48 FGnd FGnd 24 49 FGnd Not connected 25 50 Not connected Table 1 18 UBIC V DS 3 EC 1 SCSI Connector Pin Out continued Port SCSI Pin SCSI Pin Port ...

Page 97: ...e assembly that you order To support DS 1 signals select the DS 1 UBIC H cable assembly part number 15454 CADS1 H length DS 3 75Ω Port 1 DS 3 75Ω Port 2 FGND FGND FGND Pin 1 Pin 5 DS 3 75Ω Port 11 Pin 42 75Ω Signal To From UBIC 75Ω Signal To From 75Ω Signal To From DS 3 75Ω Port 12 Pin 46 75Ω Signal To From From To Customer DSx 273811 DS 3 EC1 Cable Port 1 Port 2 Port 11 Port 12 75Ω DS 3 EC1 signa...

Page 98: ...450 feet 15454 CADS1 H 450 550 feet 15454 CADS1 H 550 655 feet 15454 CADS1 H 655 DS 3 EC 1 cables for the UBIC H have a maximum supported distance of 450 feet 137 2 m DS 3 EC 1 cables arrive with unterminated coaxial cable at the far end and labeled with the respective port number 75 ohm BNC connectors for each port qty 12 are supplied and require that they be crimped on The following DS 3 EC 1 ca...

Page 99: ...ohm signal happens through the embedded transformer within the SCSI connector The cable s shield is connected to the connector shell This conversion is illustrated in Figure 1 27 115171 Pin 1 Pin 25 Pin 26 Pin 50 Table 1 19 UBIC H DS 1 SCSI Connector Pin Out Port SCSI Pin SCSI Pin Port 1 1 26 7 FGnd 2 27 FGnd FGnd 3 28 FGnd FGnd 4 29 FGnd 2 5 30 8 FGnd 6 31 FGnd FGnd 7 32 FGnd FGnd 8 33 FGnd 3 9 3...

Page 100: ... 1 Cable Shield to connector shell Tip DS1 1 Ring DS1 1 Tip DS1 2 Ring DS1 2 100Ω Differential DS 1 To From DSx 100Ω Differential DS 1 To From DSx Shield to connector shell Tip DS1 13 Ring DS1 13 Tip DS1 14 Ring DS1 14 100Ω Differential DS 1 To From DSx DS1 75Ω Port 1 DS1 75Ω Port 2 FGND FGND FGND Pin 1 Pin 5 DS1 75Ω Port 13 Pin 25 Pin 2 FGnd Pin 3 FGnd Pin 4 FGnd 75Ω Signal To From UBIC H 75Ω Sig...

Page 101: ...DS 1 5 Ring DS 1 5 Slate white Red blue Tip DS 1 6 Ring DS 1 6 Blue red Red orange Tip DS 1 7 Ring DS 1 7 Orange red Red green Tip DS 1 8 Ring DS 1 8 Green red Red brown Tip DS 1 9 Ring DS 1 9 Brown red Red slate Tip DS 1 10 Ring DS 1 10 Slate red Black blue Tip DS 1 11 Ring DS 1 11 Blue black Black orange Tip DS 1 12 Ring DS 1 12 Orange black Black green Tip DS 1 13 Ring DS 1 13 Green black Black...

Page 102: ...bles Figure 1 28 shows the UBIC H DS 3 EC 1 cable schematic diagram 5 17 42 11 FGnd 18 43 FGnd FGnd 19 44 FGnd FGnd 20 45 FGnd 6 21 46 12 FGnd 22 47 FGnd FGnd 23 48 FGnd FGnd 24 49 FGnd Not connected 25 50 Not connected Table 1 21 UBIC H DS 3 EC 1 SCSI Connector Pin Out continued Port SCSI Pin SCSI Pin Port ...

Page 103: ...n what is connected to them Table 1 22 shows 100Base TX connector pin assignments used with E100 Ethernet cards in the ONS 15454 DS 3 75Ω Port 1 DS 3 75Ω Port 2 FGND FGND Pin 1 Pin 5 DS 3 75Ω Port 11 Pin 42 75Ω Signal To From UBIC 75Ω Signal To From 75Ω Signal To From DS 3 75Ω Port 12 Pin 46 75Ω Signal To From From To Customer DSx 273809 DS 3 EC1 Cable Port 1 Port 2 Port 11 Port 12 75Ω DS 3 EC1 si...

Page 104: ...gure 1 29 100BaseT Connector Pins Figure 1 30 shows the straight through Ethernet cable schematic Use a straight through cable when connecting to a router or a PC Figure 1 30 Straight Through Cable Table 1 22 E100 TX Connector Pinout Pin Cable Port 1 RD 2 RD 3 TD 4 NC 5 NC 6 TD 7 NC 8 NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 H5436 Switch 3 TD 6 TD 1 RD 2 RD Router or PC 3 RD 6 RD 1 TD 2 TD H5578 ...

Page 105: ...ary to create a larger opening if you need to route CAT 5 Ethernet cables out the side for example To remove the fiber guide take out the three screws that anchor it to the side of the shelf assembly A fold down door that provides access to the cable management tray Cable tie wrap facilities on EIAs that secure cables to the cover panel A cable routing channel that enables you to route cables out ...

Page 106: ...e left and Slots 12 to 17 exit to the right Figure 1 33 shows fibers routed from cards in the left slots down through the fins then exiting out the fiber channel to the left The maximum capacity of the fiber routing channel depends on the size of the fiber jumpers Table 1 23 gives the maximum capacity of the fiber channel for each side of the shelf for the different fiber sizes Figure 1 33 Fiber C...

Page 107: ...ation requires 68 fibers you must use 2 mm 0 7 inch or smaller fibers 1 11 2 Fiber Management Using the Tie Down Bar You can install an optional 5 inch 127 mm tie down bar on the rear of the ANSI chassis You can use tie wraps or other site specific material to bundle the cabling and attach it to the bar so that you can more easily route the cable away from the rack Figure 1 34 shows the tie down b...

Page 108: ...3 inch 584 2 mm rack two additional inches 50 8 mm of cable management area is available on each side of the shelf assembly 1 12 Alarm Expansion Panel The optional ONS 15454 alarm expansion panel AEP can be used with the Alarm Interface Controller International card AIC I card to provide an additional 48 dry alarm contacts for the ONS 15454 32 of which are inputs and 16 are outputs The AEP is a pr...

Page 109: ...mon 48 VDC output and a maximum of 2 mA per input Each opto metal oxide semiconductor MOS alarm output can operate by definable alarm condition a maximum open circuit voltage of 60 VDC anda maximum current of 100 mA See the 2 7 2 External Alarms and Controls section on page 2 30 for further information 1 12 1 Wire Wrap and Pin Connections Figure 1 37 shows the wire wrapping connections on the back...

Page 110: ...gnals on the AIC I and AEP Figure 1 38 is a circuit diagram of the alarm inputs Inputs 1 and 32 are shown in the example Table 1 24 Pin Assignments for the AEP AEP Cable Wire Backplane Pin AIC I Signal AEP Signal Black A1 GND AEP_GND White A2 AE_ 5 AEP_ 5 Slate A3 VBAT VBAT Violet A4 VB VB Blue A5 AE_CLK_P AE_CLK_P Green A6 AE_CLK_N AE_CLK_N Yellow A7 AE_DIN_P AE_DOUT_P Orange A8 AE_DIN_N AE_DOUT_...

Page 111: ...in Association AMPChamp Pin Number Signal Name AMPChamp Pin Number Signal Name 1 ALARM_IN_1 27 GND 2 GND 28 ALARM_IN_2 3 ALARM_IN_3 29 ALARM_IN_4 4 ALARM_IN_5 30 GND 5 GND 31 ALARM_IN_6 6 ALARM_IN_7 32 ALARM_IN_8 7 ALARM_IN_9 33 GND 8 GND 34 ALARM_IN_10 9 ALARM_IN_11 35 ALARM_IN_12 10 ALARM_IN_13 36 GND 11 GND 37 ALARM_IN_14 12 ALARM_IN_15 38 ALARM_IN_16 13 ALARM_IN_17 39 GND 14 GND 40 ALARM_IN_18...

Page 112: ... by external alarms 20 GND 46 ALARM_IN_26 21 ALARM_IN_27 47 ALARM_IN_28 22 ALARM_IN_29 48 GND 23 GND 49 ALARM_IN_30 24 ALARM_IN_31 50 N C 25 ALARM_IN_ 51 GND1 26 ALARM_IN_0 52 GND2 Table 1 25 Alarm Input Pin Association continued AMPChamp Pin Number Signal Name AMPChamp Pin Number Signal Name 78474 Station max 60 V 100 mA AEP AIE Output 1 Output 16 Table 1 26 Pin Association for Alarm Output Pins ...

Page 113: ...card has the label FILLER on the faceplate The non detectable card has no faceplate label In Software Release 6 0 and greater the former card is detectable through CTC when installed in the ONS 15454 shelf Figure 1 40 shows the faceplate of the detectable filler card The filler cards have no card level LED indicators 7 N C 33 COM_4 8 COM_5 34 N C 9 NO_5 35 NO_6 10 N C 36 COM_6 11 COM_7 37 N C 12 N...

Page 114: ...mbly is located at the bottom of the ONS 15454 bay assembly The fan tray is a removable drawer that holds fans and fan control circuitry for the ONS 15454 The front door can be left in place or removed before installing the fan tray assembly After you install the fan tray you should only need to access it if a fan failure occurs or if you need to replace or clean the fan tray air filter 124234 FIL...

Page 115: ...installed in ONS 15454 shelf assemblies released before ONS 15454 Release 3 1 15454 SA NEBS3E 15454 SA NEBS3 and 15454 SA R1 P N 800 07149 Equipment damage can result from attempting to install the 15454 FTA3 in a noncompatible shelf assembly Note 15454 CC FTA is compatible with Software Release 2 2 2 and greater and shelf assemblies 15454 SA HD and 15454 SA ANSI Note The 15454 FTA3 is not I temp ...

Page 116: ...Yes Yes OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 4 Yes Yes OC48 IR 1310 Yes Yes OC48 LR 1550 Yes Yes OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 Yes Yes OC48 LR STM16 LH AS 1550 Yes Yes OC48 ELR STM16 EH 100 GHz Yes Yes OC48 ELR 200 GHz Yes Yes OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 Yes Yes OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550 Yes Yes OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 Yes Yes OC192 LR STM64 LH ITU 15xx xx Yes Yes 15454_MRC 12 Yes Yes MRC 2 5G 4 Yes Yes OC192SR1 STM64IO Short ...

Page 117: ...indicate that a fan tray assembly or AIP replacement is required But the Fan Fail LED on the 15454 CC FTA will also illuminate when only one power source is connected to the chassis and or any fuse blows In such conditions the Fan Alarm is triggered and the fans run at maximum speed 1 14 4 Air Filter The ONS 15454 contains a reusable air filter Model 15454 FTF2 that is installed either beneath the...

Page 118: ...TA can generate is suitable to blow the fuses listed in the Table 1 28 Similar to CC FTA 15454 FTA3 T 800 23907 01 and 800 23907 05 can also operate the pilot fuses mentioned in Table 1 28 when the main fuse is missing Unlike CC FTA FTA3 T alternatively drains the current from the two batteries every 50 100 msec to feed the fans Table 1 28 Pilot Fuse Ratings This is accomplished in the I temp rang...

Page 119: ...nd Posts on the ONS 15454 Backplane 1 16 Alarm Timing LAN and Craft Pin Connections Caution Always use the supplied ESD wristband when working with a powered ONS 15454 Plug the wristband cable into the ESD jack located on the lower right outside edge of the shelf assembly The ONS 15454 has a backplane pin field located at the bottom of the backplane The backplane pin field provides 0 045 square in...

Page 120: ...audible alarm B2 A3 Alarm output pair number 3 Major audible alarm A1 B3 B1 A4 Alarm output pair number 4 Minor audible alarm A2 B4 B2 LOCAL ALARMS VIS Visual A1 Alarm output pair number 1 Remote visual alarm A3 B1 A2 Alarm output pair number 2 Critical visual alarm B2 A3 Alarm output pair number 3 Major visual alarm B3 A4 Alarm output pair number 4 Minor visual alarm B4 A1 A2 B3 A4 B4 RJ 45 pin 2...

Page 121: ...ive B2 A3 BITS Output 1 negative A3 Normally open output pair number 3 B3 BITS Output 1 positive B3 A4 BITS Input 1 negative A4 Normally open output pair number 4 B4 BITS Input 1 positive B4 LAN Connecting to a hub or switch ACO A1 Normally open ACO pair A1 B1 B1 CRAFT A1 Receive PC pin 2 A2 A2 Transmit PC pin 3 B2 A3 Ground PC pin 5 A4 DTR PC pin 4 LOCAL ALARMS AUD Audible N O N O A1 Alarm output...

Page 122: ...nection use 100 ohm shielded BITS clock cable pair 22 or 24 AWG 0 51 mm 0 020 inch or 0 64 mm 0 0252 inch twisted pair T1 type Note Refer to Telcordia SR NWT 002224 for rules about provisioning timing references For more information see Chapter 10 Timing 1 16 3 LAN Connections Use the LAN pins on the ONS 15454 backplane to connect the ONS 15454 to a workstation or Ethernet LAN or to a LAN modem fo...

Page 123: ...o use the serial port craft interface wire wrap pins on the backplane the DTR signal line on the backplane port wire wrap pin must be connected and active 1 17 Cards and Slots ONS 15454 cards have electrical plugs at the back that plug into electrical connectors on the shelf assembly backplane When the ejectors are fully closed the card plugs into the assembly backplane Figure 1 44 shows card inst...

Page 124: ...CC2 TCC2P cards Slots 8 and 10 are dedicated to cross connect XCVT XC10G and XC VXC 10G cards Slot 9 is reserved for the optional AIC I card Slots 3 and 15 can also host electrical cards that are used for 1 N protection See the 7 1 Electrical Card Protection section on page 7 1 for a list of electrical cards that can operate as protect cards Caution Do not operate the ONS 15454 with a single TCC2 ...

Page 125: ...cards with a cross symbol on the faceplate Red P Protection slot in 1 N protection schemes Red Diamond AIC I slot Slot 9 Only install ONS 15454 cards with a diamond symbol on the faceplate Gold Star Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17 Only install ONS 15454 cards with a star symbol on the faceplate Blue Hexagon Only used with the 15454 SA HD shelf assembly Slots 3 and 15 Only install ONS 15454 cards with a ...

Page 126: ...e CE MR 10 10 1000 Mbps LC SFP Copper SFP RJ45 Faceplate OC 3 IR 4 155 52 Mbps STS 3 SC Faceplate OC3 IR STM4 SH 1310 8 8 155 52 Mbps STS 3 LC Faceplate OC 12 STM4 4 IR LR 4 622 08 Mbps STS 12 SC Faceplate OC 12 IR LR 1 622 08 Mbps STS 12 SC Faceplate OC 48 IR LR ELR 1 2488 32 Mbps STS 48 SC Faceplate OC 48 AS IR LR 1 2488 32 Mbps STS 48 SC Faceplate OC 48 ELR 100GHz 200GHz 1 2488 32 Mbps STS 48 S...

Page 127: ...ever a card is removed and reinserted reseated is performed unless the card is deleted in CTC first The alarm clears after the card replacement is complete Note In a path protection configuration pulling the active XCVT XC10G without a lockout causes path protection circuits to switch 15454_MRC 12 12 Up to 2488 32 Mbps STM 48 depending on SFP LC Faceplate MRC 2 5G 4 4 Up to 2488 32 Mbps STS 48 dep...

Page 128: ...Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible AIC I All Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible DS1 14 All Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible DS1N 14 All Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully comp...

Page 129: ...Fully compatible ML1000 2 All Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible ML100X 8 All Not supported Not supported Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible ML MR 104 SA HD and SA ANSI Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Fully compati...

Page 130: ... IR STM64 SH 1550 SA HD and SA ANSI Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported OC192 LH STM64 LH 1550 SA HD and SA ANSI Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported OC192 LR STM64 LH ITU 15xx xx SA HD and SA ANSI Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not suppo...

Page 131: ...tible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible XC10G SA HD and SA ANSI Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible AIC All Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible AIC I All Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compat...

Page 132: ...ly supported Not supported Not supported G1K 4 SA HD and SA ANSI Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible ML100T 12 All Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible ML1000 2 All Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fu...

Page 133: ...I Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550 SA HD and SA ANSI Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible OC192 LH STM64 LH 1550 SA HD and SA ANSI Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully compatible Fully comp...

Page 134: ...ility If an upgrade is required for compatibility contact the Cisco Technical Assistance Center TAC For contact information go to http www cisco com tac 3 Slots 1 to 4 and 14 to 17 give a total bandwidth of up to 2 5 Gb s Slots 5 6 12 and 13 give a total bandwidth of up to 10 Gb s 4 These cards are designated as OC192 XFP in CTC ...

Page 135: ...5454 common control card functions For installation and turn up procedures refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter topics include 2 1 Common Control Card Overview page 2 1 2 2 TCC2 Card page 2 6 2 3 TCC2P Card page 2 10 2 4 XCVT Card page 2 15 2 5 XC10G Card page 2 19 2 6 XC VXC 10G Card page 2 23 2 7 AIC I Card page 2 28 2 1 Common Control Card Overview The card overview section summ...

Page 136: ...ment for switching it establishes connections and performs time division switching TDS The XCVT can manage STS and Virtual Tributary VT circuits up to 48c See the 2 4 XCVT Card section on page 2 15 XC10G The 10 Gigabit Cross Connect XC10G card is the central element for switching it establishes connections and performs TDS The XC10G can manage STS and VT circuits up to 192c The XC10G allows up to ...

Page 137: ...ross connect card Table 2 3 lists the cross connect card compatibility for each common control card Table 2 2 Common Control Card Software Release Compatibility Card R3 3 R3 4 R4 0 R4 1 R4 5 R4 6 R4 7 R5 0 R6 0 R7 0 R7 2 R8 0 R8 5 TCC Yes Yes Yes Yes TCC2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Y es Yes TCC2P Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes XC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes1 1 The XC card does no...

Page 138: ...t does not support features new to Release 5 0 and later AEP Yes Yes Yes 1 Requires SA ANSI or SA HD shelf assembly 2 The TCC is not compatible with Software R4 5 or greater 3 These cross connect cards are compatible only during an upgrade Table 2 3 Common Control Card Cross Connect Compatibility continued Card XCVT Card XC10G Card1 XC VXC 10G Card1 Table 2 4 Electrical Card Cross Connect Compatib...

Page 139: ... 4 Yes Yes OC48 LR 1550 Yes Yes Yes OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 Yes2 Yes Yes OC48 LR STM16 LH AS 1550 Yes2 Yes Yes OC48 ELR STM16 EH 100 GHz Yes Yes Yes OC48 ELR 200 GHz Yes Yes Yes OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 Yes Yes OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550 Yes Yes OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 Yes Yes OC192 LR STM64 LH ITU 15xx xx Yes Yes OC192SR1 STM64 IO Short Reach and OC192 STM64 Any Reach OC192 XFP cards Yes Yes 15454_MRC ...

Page 140: ... 4 0 0 or later Note The LAN interface of the TCC2 card meets the standard Ethernet specifications by supporting a cable length of 328 ft 100 m at temperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit 0 to 65 degrees Celsius The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32 8 ft 10 m maximum at temperatures from 40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 0 degrees Celsius Figure 2 1 shows the faceplate and blo...

Page 141: ...interfaces FAIL A PWR B ACT STBY ACO CRIT MIN REM SYNC RS 232 TCP IP MAJ ACO TCC2 LAMP BACKPLANE Ethernet Repeater Mate TCC2 Ethernet Port Backplane Ethernet Port Shared with Mate TCC2 SDRAM Memory Compact Flash FPGA TCCA ASIC SCL Processor Serial Debug Modem Interface RS 232 Craft Interface Backplane RS 232 Port Shared with Mate TCC2 Faceplate RS 232 Port Note Only 1 RS 232 Port Can Be Active Bac...

Page 142: ...s when the bit error rate BER counts are not in excess of 1 10 exp 3 and completion time is less than 50 ms The TCC2 card has two built in interface ports for accessing the system an RJ 45 10BaseT LAN interface and an EIA TIA 232 ASCII interface for local craft access It also has a 10BaseT LAN port for user interfaces over the backplane Note When using the LAN RJ 45 craft interface or back panel w...

Page 143: ...LEDs blink To avoid memory corruption do not remove the TCC2 when the active or standby LED is blinking TCC2 Network Level Indicators System Level LEDs Definition Red CRIT LED Indicates critical alarms in the network at the local terminal Red MAJ LED Indicates major alarms in the network at the local terminal Amber MIN LED Indicates minor alarms in the network at the local terminal Red REM LED Pro...

Page 144: ...emperatures from 32 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit 0 to 65 degrees Celsius The interfaces can operate with a cable length of 32 8 ft 10 m maximum at temperatures from 40 to 32 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 0 degrees Celsius Figure 2 2 shows the faceplate and block diagram for the TCC2P card Table 2 9 TCC2 Power Level Indicators Power Level LEDs Definition Green Amber Red PWR A LED The PWR A LED is green whe...

Page 145: ...L A PWR B ACT STBY ACO CRIT MIN REM SYNC RS 232 TCP IP MAJ ACO TCC2P LAMP BACKPLANE Ethernet Switch Mate TCC2 Ethernet Port Backplane Ethernet Port Shared with Mate TCC2 SDRAM Memory Compact Flash FPGA TCCA ASIC SCL Processor Serial Debug Modem Interface RS 232 Craft Interface Backplane RS 232 Port Shared with Mate TCC2 Faceplate RS 232 Port Note Only 1 RS 232 Port Can Be Active Backplane Port Wil...

Page 146: ...llow for craft interface in TL1 mode Note To use the serial port craft interface wire wrap pins on the backplane the DTR signal line on the backplane port wire wrap pin must be connected and active Note When using the LAN RJ 45 craft interface or back panel wirewrap LAN connection the connection must be 10BASE T half duplex Full duplex and autonegotiate settings should not be used because they mig...

Page 147: ...A BITS output interface configured as 6 312 MHz complies with ITU T G 703 Appendix II Table II 4 with a monitor level of 40 dBm 4 dBm 2 3 1 1 2 SDH Timing Operation The TCC2P card supports typical external E1 SDH timing sources so that the card can be provisioned to accept either an SDH or SONET timing standard The initial default is for the card to use SONET timing the default can be changed to S...

Page 148: ...e TCC2P is writing to its database or to the standby TCC2P database the card LEDs blink To avoid memory corruption do not remove the TCC2P when the active or standby LED is blinking Table 2 11 TCC2P Network Level Indicators System Level LEDs Definition Red CRIT LED Indicates critical alarms in the network at the local terminal Red MAJ LED Indicates major alarms in the network at the local terminal...

Page 149: ...en when the voltage on supply input A is between the low battery voltage LWBATVG and high battery voltage HIBATVG thresholds The LED is amber when the voltage on supply input A is between the high battery voltage and extremely high battery voltage EHIBATVG thresholds or between the low battery voltage and extremely low battery voltage ELWBATVG thresholds The LED is red when the voltage on supply i...

Page 150: ...be cross connected dropped or rearranged The TCC2 TCC2P card assigns bandwidth to each slot on a per STS 1 or per VT1 5 basis The switch matrices are fully crosspoint and broadcast supporting The XCVT card provides 288 STS bidirectional ports 144 STS bidirectional cross connects 672 VT1 5 ports via 24 logical STS ports 336 VT1 5 bidirectional cross connects Nonblocking at the STS level STS 1 3c 6c...

Page 151: ...e same type two XCVT or two XC10G cards must always be installed Figure 2 4 shows the cross connect matrix Figure 2 4 XCVT Cross Connect Matrix 2 4 2 VT Mapping The VT structure is designed to transport and switch payloads below the DS 3 rate The ONS 15454 performs VT mapping according to Telcordia GR 253 CORE standards Table 2 13 shows the VT numbering scheme for the ONS 15454 as it relates to th...

Page 152: ... XCVT card can host a maximum of 336 bidirectional VT1 5s 2 4 4 XCVT Card Level Indicators Table 2 14 shows the two card level LEDs on the XCVT card faceplate VT9 Group2 VT2 VT10 Group3 VT2 VT11 Group4 VT2 VT12 Group5 VT2 VT13 Group6 VT2 VT14 Group7 VT2 VT15 Group1 VT3 VT16 Group2 VT3 VT17 Group3 VT3 VT18 Group4 VT3 VT19 Group5 VT3 VT20 Group6 VT3 VT21 Group7 VT3 VT22 Group1 VT4 VT23 Group2 VT4 VT...

Page 153: ...o four times the bandwidth of the XCVT cards The XC10G provides a maximum of 576 STS 1 cross connections through 1152 STS 1 ports Any STS 1 on any port can be connected to any other port meaning that the STS cross connections are nonblocking Figure 2 5 shows the XC10G faceplate and block diagram Table 2 14 XCVT Card Level Indicators Card Level Indicators Definition Red FAIL LED Indicates that the ...

Page 154: ...t circuit information through the CTC The cross connect card establishes the proper internal cross connect information and sends the setup information to the cross connect card The XC10G card provides 1152 STS bidirectional ports 576 STS bidirectional cross connects 672 VT1 5 ports via 24 logical STS ports 336 VT1 5 bidirectional cross connects Nonblocking at STS level STS 1 3c 6c 12c 48c 192c cro...

Page 155: ... ONS 15454 performs VT mapping according to Telcordia GR 253 CORE standards Table 2 15 shows the VT numbering scheme for the ONS 15454 as it relates to the Telcordia standard 1 2 25 Input Ports Output Ports 4X STS 192 8X STS 48 8X STS 48 4X STS 192 XC10G STS 1 Cross connect ASIC 1152x1152 STS 1 VT 1 5 Cross connect ASIC 336 bidirectional VT 1 5 cross connects 55386 1 2 25 VTXC VT cross connection ...

Page 156: ...Group6 VT2 VT14 Group7 VT2 VT15 Group1 VT3 VT16 Group2 VT3 VT17 Group3 VT3 VT18 Group4 VT3 VT19 Group5 VT3 VT20 Group6 VT3 VT21 Group7 VT3 VT22 Group1 VT4 VT23 Group2 VT4 VT24 Group3 VT4 VT25 Group4 VT4 VT26 Group5 VT4 VT27 Group6 VT4 VT28 Group7 VT4 Table 2 15 VT Mapping continued ONS 15454 VT Number Telcordia Group VT Number Table 2 16 XC10G Card Level Indicators Card Level Indicators Definition...

Page 157: ...d in Slots 1 to 4 or 14 to 17 If you are using Ethernet cards the E1000 2 G or the E100T G must be used when the XC10G or XC VXC 10G cross connect card is in use Do not pair an XCVT card with an XC10G or XC VXC 10G card When upgrading from an XCVT to the XC10G or XC VXC 10G card refer to the Upgrade Cards and Spans chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for more information 2 6 XC VXC 10G ...

Page 158: ...ow order ports or 2016 VT2 low order ports or 1344 bidirectional VT1 5 ports and 1008 bidirectional VT2 ports mixed grooming The TCC2 TCC2P card assigns bandwidth to each slot on a per STS 1 per VT1 5 or per VT2 basis The switch matrices are fully crosspoint and broadcast supporting XC VXC 10G Backplane Connectors IBPIA 2 EDVT Serial Port STS 1 Cross Connect ASIC TU Cross Connect ASIC VT Cross Con...

Page 159: ...s Mixed grooming 50 VT1 5 and 50 VT2 Nonblocking at the STS level VT1 5 VT2 and STS 1 3c 6c 12c 48c 192c cross connects Note VT 2 circuit provisioning works between optical cards and the DS3 EC1 48 card EC1 ports not the ports provisioned for DS3 The XC VXC 10G supports errorless side switches switching from one XC VXC 10G on one side of the shelf to the other XC VXC 10G on the other side of the s...

Page 160: ...Output Ports 4X STS 192 8X STS 48 8X STS 48 4X STS 192 XC XVC 10G STS 1 Cross connect ASIC 1152x1152 STS 1 VT 1 5 VT 2 Cross connect ASIC TU 3 Cross connect ASIC bypassed in SONETmode 6X STS 48 2X STS 48 VT Ports 2X STS 48 VT Ports 1344 bidirectional VT 1 5 cross connects or 1008 bidirectional VT 2 cross connects or Mixed grooming 50 VT1 5 and 50 VT2 1 2 20 VTXC TUXC 134272 Table 2 17 VT Mapping O...

Page 161: ...ceplate VT14 Group7 VT2 VT15 Group1 VT3 VT16 Group2 VT3 VT17 Group3 VT3 VT18 Group4 VT3 VT19 Group5 VT3 VT20 Group6 VT3 VT21 Group7 VT3 VT22 Group1 VT4 VT23 Group2 VT4 VT24 Group3 VT4 VT25 Group4 VT4 VT26 Group5 VT4 VT27 Group6 VT4 VT28 Group7 VT4 Table 2 17 VT Mapping continued ONS 15454 VT Number Telcordia Group VT Number Table 2 18 XC VXC 10G Card Level Indicators Card Level Indicators Definiti...

Page 162: ...ide for more information Also refer to the 2 1 2 Card Compatibility section on page 2 3 2 7 AIC I Card Note For hardware specifications see the A 4 6 AIC I Card Specifications section on page A 15 The optional Alarm Interface Controller International AIC I card provides customer defined environmental alarms and controls and supports local and express orderwire It provides 12 customer defined input...

Page 163: ...x2 AIC I FPGA SCL links 4 x IN OUT Power Monitoring 12 16 x IN Ringer Act Ring Ring Input Output 78828 FAIL ACT ACC INPUT OUTPUT EOW LOW RING AIC 1 DTMF DTMF UDC A UDC B DCC A DCC B ACC PWR A B RING DCC B DCC A UDC B UDC A Table 2 19 AIC I Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description Red FAIL LED Indicates that the cards processor is not ready The FAIL LED is on during Reset and flashes durin...

Page 164: ...Non Service Affecting alarm service level 63 character alarm description for CTC display in the alarm log You cannot assign the fan tray abbreviation for the alarm the abbreviation reflects the generic name of the input contacts The alarm condition remains raised until the external input stops driving the contact or you unprovision the alarm input You cannot assign the fan tray abbreviation for th...

Page 165: ... encoded voice channel that uses E1 or E2 bytes in section line overhead The AIC I allows simultaneous use of both local section overhead signal and express line overhead signal orderwire channels on an SDH ring or particular optics facility Express orderwire also allows communication via regeneration sites when the regenerator is not a Cisco device You can provision orderwire functions with CTC s...

Page 166: ... 10 shows the standard RJ 11 connectors used for orderwire ports Use a shielded RJ 11 cable Figure 2 10 RJ 11 Connector 2 7 4 Power Monitoring The AIC I card provides a power monitoring circuit that monitors the supply voltage of 48 VDC for presence undervoltage or overvoltage 2 7 5 User Data Channel The user data channel UDC features a dedicated data channel of 64 kbps F1 byte between two nodes i...

Page 167: ...DCC A and DCC B through separate RJ 45 connectors on the front of the AIC I card Use a shielded RJ 45 cable Each DCC can be routed to an individual optical interface in the ONS 15454 The DCC ports are standard RJ 45 receptacles Table 2 22 lists the DCC pin assignments Table 2 21 UDC Pin Assignments RJ 11 Pin Number Description 1 For future use 2 TXN 3 RXN 4 RXP 5 TXP 6 For future use Table 2 22 DC...

Page 168: ...2 34 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 2 Common Control Cards 2 7 6 Data Communications Channel ...

Page 169: ...e Testing page 3 4 3 3 EC1 12 Card page 3 5 3 4 DS1 14 and DS1N 14 Cards page 3 7 3 5 DS1 E1 56 Card page 3 10 3 6 DS3 12 and DS3N 12 Cards page 3 13 3 7 DS3 EC1 48 Card page 3 16 3 8 DS3i N 12 Card page 3 19 3 9 DS3 12E and DS3N 12E Cards page 3 21 3 10 DS3XM 6 Card page 3 25 3 11 DS3XM 12 Card page 3 27 3 1 Electrical Card Overview Each card is marked with a symbol that corresponds to a slot or ...

Page 170: ...e 3 10 DS3 12 The DS3 12 card provides 12 Telcordia compliant GR 499 DS 3 ports per card Each port operates at 44 736 Mbps over a single 75 ohm 728A or equivalent coaxial span See the 3 6 DS3 12 and DS3N 12 Cards section on page 3 13 DS3N 12 The DS3N 12 card supports the same features as the DS3 12 but can also provide 1 N N 5 protection See the 3 6 DS3 12 and DS3N 12 Cards section on page 3 13 DS...

Page 171: ...s twelve framed DS 3 network connections to 28x12 or 168 VT1 5s See the 3 11 DS3XM 12 Card section on page 3 27 Table 3 1 Cisco ONS 15454 Electrical Cards continued Card Name Description For Additional Information Table 3 2 Electrical Card Software Release Compatibility Electrical Card R2 2 2 R3 0 1 R3 1 R3 2 R3 3 R3 4 R4 0 R4 1 R4 5 R4 6 R4 7 R5 0 R6 0 R7 0 R7 2 8 0 8 5 EC1 12 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes...

Page 172: ...tion and monitoring on the backplane side You can enable TPGM B on a port only if the port has a bidirectional circuit Note The port must be in Out of Service and Maintenance OOS MT state before enabling TPGM L or TPGM B OOS MT state puts the circuit cross connects to a service state This service state does not interrupt traffic flow and allows loopbacks to be performed on the circuit OOS MT howev...

Page 173: ...hresholds is done on the SONET ring interfaces optical cards in conjunction with the STS cross connect The EC1 12 terminates but does not select the 12 working STS 1 signals from the backplane The EC1 12 maps each of the 12 received EC1 signals into 12 STS 1s with visibility into the SONET path overhead An EC1 12 card can be 1 1 protected with another EC1 12 card but cannot protect more than one E...

Page 174: ...to the XCVT XC10G or XC VXC 10G card where the payload is further aggregated for efficient transport XCVT cards can host a maximum of 288 bidirectional STS 1s The XC10G and XC VXC 10G cards can host up to 1152 bidirectional STS 1s 3 3 4 EC1 12 Card Level Indicators Table 3 4 describes the three card level LEDs on the EC1 12 card Line Interface Unit main STS1 protect STS1 STS 12 12xSTS 1 Mux Demux ...

Page 175: ...ectors You can also provision the DS1 14 to monitor for line and frame errors in both directions You can group and map DS1 14 card traffic in STS 1 increments to any other card in an ONS 15454 except DS 3 cards Each DS 1 is asynchronously mapped into a SONET VT1 5 payload and the card carries a DS 1 payload intact in a VT1 5 For performance monitoring purposes you can gather bidirectional DS 1 fra...

Page 176: ...ces of up to 655 feet 200 meters depending on facility conditions 3 4 2 DS1 14 and DS1N 14 Slot Compatibility You can install the DS1 14 card in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 on the ONS 15454 3 4 3 DS1 14 and DS1N 14 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3 2 shows the DS1 14 faceplate and the block diagram of the card Figure 3 2 DS1 14 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3 3 shows the DS1N 14 faceplate and...

Page 177: ...10G or XC VXC 10G cards where the payload is further aggregated for efficient STS 1 transport The XC10G and XCVT cards manage up to 336 bidirectional VT1 5 ports The XC VXC 10G card can manage up to 2688 bidirectional VT1 5 ports 3 4 5 DS1 14 and DS1N 14 Card Level Indicators Table 3 5 describes the three card level LEDs on the DS1 14 and DS1N 14 card faceplates 14 Line Interface Units STS1 to 14 ...

Page 178: ...ibutary 2 circuit creation on E1 ports Caution When a protection switch moves traffic from the active or working DS1 E1 56 card to the standby or protect DS1 E1 56 card ports on the now standby or protect card cannot be moved to Out of Service state Traffic is dropped if the ports are in Out of Service state 3 5 1 DS1 E1 56 Slots and Connectors For SONET applications the DS1 E1 56 card requires a ...

Page 179: ... backplane EIA the card supports SCSI UBIC connectors See the 7 2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane section on page 7 5 for more information about electrical card slot protection and restrictions Connectivity error rate and error count of the traffic running on an Electrical IO card ports can be tested by using BERT For more information on BERT see 3 2 Bit Error Rate Testing page 3 4 3 ...

Page 180: ...ndicators Table 3 7 131201 U B I C DS1 x56 ports XFMR MUX DS1 Analog x8 ports DS1 Digital x8 ports DS1 Digital x8 ports DS1 Digital x8 ports DS1 Analog x8 ports DS1 Analog x8 ports DS1 E1 Octal LIU 1 DS1 E1 Octal LIU 2 DS1 E1 Octal LIU 7 LIUs 3 thru 6 not shown Agere Ultramapper AD BUS to PROC SCL LINK to TCC 622MHz Ref 38MHz Ref s STS 12 Data TSWC Clock Synth MAIN Data PROT Data Stingray FPGA 4 B...

Page 181: ...BIC connectors Caution When a protection switch moves traffic from the DS3 12 working active card to the DS3 12 protect standby card ports on the now active standby card cannot be taken out of service Lost traffic can result if you take a port out of service even if the DS3 12 standby card no longer carries traffic Other than protection capabilities the DS3 12 and DS3N 12 cards are identical The D...

Page 182: ... 450 feet depending on facility conditions With the proper backplane EIA the card supports BNC or SMB connectors See the 7 2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane section on page 7 5 for more information about electrical card slot protection and restrictions 3 6 2 DS3 12 and DS3N 12 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3 5 shows the DS3 12 faceplate and a block diagram of the card Figure 3 5 ...

Page 183: ...1348 Protection Relay Matrix B a c k p l a n e 12 Line Interface Units FAIL ACT STBY SF DS3N 12 1345987 Table 3 8 DS3 12 and DS3N 12 Card Level Indicators Card Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists ACT STBY LED Green Active Amber Standby When the ACT STBY LED is green the card is opera...

Page 184: ...w active standby card cannot be taken out of service Lost traffic can result if you take a port out of service even if the DS3 EC1 48 standby card no longer carries traffic 3 7 1 DS3 EC1 48 Slots and Connectors For SONET applications the DS3 EC1 48 card requires an HD shelf 15454 SA HD and EIA UBIC MiniBNC Software Release 5 0 or greater and XC10G or XC VXC 10G cards Note The DS3 EC1 48 card suppo...

Page 185: ... in Slots 16 or 17 if you have installed an MXP_2 5G_10G card in Slot 15 If you do the cards will interact and cause DS 3 bit errors With the proper backplane EIA the card supports BNC or SCSI UBIC connectors See the 7 2 Electrical Card Protection and the Backplane section on page 7 5 for more information about electrical card slot protection and restrictions 3 7 2 DS3 EC1 48 Faceplate and Block D...

Page 186: ... Diagram 3 7 3 DS3 EC1 48 Card Level Indicators The DS3 EC1 48 card has three card level LED indicators Table 3 10 115955 FAIL ACT STBY SF DS3 EC1 48 Main Protect SCL Bus s Processor 48 DS3 EC1 Ports UBIC V UBIC H or HD MiniBNC Transformers Protection Mux Relays 4x DS3 EC1 Framer Mapper LIU STS 48 Mapper FPGA B a c k p l a n e MAIN IBPIA ASIC PROTECT IBPIA ASIC ...

Page 187: ...and transport it between SONET and SDH networks through AU4 STS 3 trunks with the ability to add and drop DS3s to an STS3 trunk at intermediate nodes 3 8 1 DS3i N 12 Slots and Connectors You can install the DS3i N 12 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 The DS3i N 12 can operate as the protect card in a 1 N N 5 DS 3 protection group on a half shelf basis with protection cards in Slots 3 and 15 It has...

Page 188: ...G 707 mapped into VC 4 and transported as STS 3c Idle signal 1100 monitoring as per Telcordia GR 499 CORE P bit monitoring C bit parity monitoring X bit monitoring M bit monitoring F bit monitoring Far end block error FEBE monitoring Far end alarm and control FEAC status and loop code detection Path trace byte support with TIM P alarm generation 134365 B a c k p l a n e DS3 ASIC Flash uP bus SDRAM...

Page 189: ...he DS3 12E can detect several different errored logic bits within a DS3 frame This function allows the ONS 15454 to identify a degrading DS3 facility caused by upstream electronics DS3 Framer In addition DS3 frame format autodetection and J1 path trace are supported By monitoring additional overhead in the DS3 frame subtle network degradations can be detected The following list summarizes DS3 12E ...

Page 190: ...o protect up to five working DS3 12E cards The basic DS3 12E card can only function as the protect card for one other DS3 12E card 3 9 1 DS3 12E and DS3N 12E Slots and Connectors You can install the DS3 12E and DS3N 12E cards in Slots 1 to 6 or 12 to 17 on the ONS 15454 Each DS3 12E and DS3N 12E port features DSX level outputs supporting distances up to 137 meters 450 feet With the proper backplan...

Page 191: ...gure 3 9 DS3 12E Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 3 10 shows the DS3N 12E faceplate and a block diagram of the card 61349 B a c k p l a n e DS3 ASIC Flash uP bus SDRAM BTC ASIC Line Interface Unit 1 main DS3 m1 protect DS3 p1 Line Interface Unit 1 main DS3 m12 protect DS3 p12 Processor OHP FPGA BERT FPGA FAIL ACT SF DS3 12E ...

Page 192: ... DS3 p1 Line Interface Unit 1 main DS3 m12 protect DS3 p12 Processor OHP FPGA BERT FPGA FAIL ACT STBY SF DS3 N 12E Table 3 12 DS3 12E and DS3N 12E Card Level Indicators Card Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists ACT STBY LED Green Active Amber Standby When the ACT STBY LED is green the...

Page 193: ...a transmux card provides six Telcordia compliant GR 499 CORE M13 multiplexing ports The DS3XM 6 converts six framed DS 3 network connections to 28 x6 or 168 VT1 5s DS3XM 6 cards operate at the VT1 5 level 3 10 1 DS3XM 6 Slots and Connectors The DS3XM 6 card supports 1 1 protection with the proper backplane EIA EIAs are available with BNC or SMB connectors You can install the DS3XM 6 in Slots 1 to ...

Page 194: ... that the XCVT card then manages and cross connects XCVT cards host a maximum of 336 bidirectional VT1 5s on two DS3XM 6 cards In most network configurations two DS3XM 6 cards are paired together as working and protect cards 3 10 4 DS3XM 6 Card Level Indicators Table 3 13 describes the three card level LEDs on the DS3XM 6 card faceplate BTC ASIC 6 x Line Interface Units 6 STS1 to 28 DS1 Mapper FLA...

Page 195: ... a circuit is provisioned to a physical port its associated portless pair becomes unavailable and vice versa See the 11 4 Portless Transmux section on page 11 15 for more information The DS3XM 12 card is compatible with the XCVT XC10G and XC VXC 10G cross connect cards Note The DS3XM 12 card supports an errorless software initiated cross connect card switch when used in a shelf equipped with XC VX...

Page 196: ...NET fiber optical interface with DS 3 mapped STS 1s as a payload This physical connection is accomplished with any of the OC N cards The system cross connect grooms the DS 3 mapped STS1 traffic to the appropriate DS3XM 12 card where the traffic is demultiplexed and mapped into a VT1 5 payload This payload is then mapped and multiplexed up to a higher rate STS 1 See the 11 4 Portless Transmux secti...

Page 197: ...n about electrical card slot protection and restrictions In 1 1 or 1 N protection group with DS3XM12 cards having different backplane bandwidths when a protection switch moves traffic from the working active card to the protect standby card or vice versa it causes a traffic hit of greater than 50ms 3 11 6 Card Features Table 3 15 summarizes the DS3XM 12 features Table 3 15 DS3XM 12 Features Featur...

Page 198: ...tection DS1 frame autodetection and autoprovisioning Manual DS1 frame provisioning Works in conjunction with the DS1 autoframe detection and gives you override capability Manual DS3 frame provisioning Legacy feature C Bit and M23 frame formats are supported J1 Legacy feature extended to 6 additional ports J2 336 J2 strings are supported Portless Supports DS3 data from the backplane in addition to ...

Page 199: ...d Level Indicators Table 3 16 describes the three card level LEDs on the DS3XM 12 card faceplate 115956 Main Protect SCL Bus s Processor 12 DS3 Ports Transformers Protection Mux Relays 4x DS3 VT1 5 Framer Mapper 12 Port DS3 LIU STS 24 Mapper FPGA B a c k p l a n e MAIN IBPIA ASIC PROTECT IBPIA ASIC FAIL ACT STBY SF DS3XM 12 DS3 Mapped STS 1s Portless Mode VT1 5 Mapped STS 1 s Both Modes ...

Page 200: ...le 3 16 DS3XM 12 Card Level Indicators Card Level Indicators Description Red FAIL LED The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready It is steady while the self test runs and blinks during provisioning Replace the card if the red FAIL LED persists ACT STBY LED Green Active Amber Standby When the ACT STBY LED is green the DS3XM 12 card is operational and ready to carry traffic When...

Page 201: ...rams for each optical card For installation and card turn up procedures refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter topics include 4 1 Optical Card Overview page 4 2 4 2 OC3 IR 4 STM1 SH 1310 Card page 4 6 4 3 OC3 IR STM1 SH 1310 8 Card page 4 8 4 4 OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 Card page 4 9 4 5 OC12 LR STM4 LH 1310 Card page 4 11 4 6 OC12 LR STM4 LH 1550 Card page 4 13 4 7 OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 4...

Page 202: ... 1310 Card section on page 4 6 OC3 IR STM1 SH 1310 8 The OC3 IR STM1 SH 1310 8 card provides eight intermediate or short range OC 3 ports and operates at 1310 nm See the 4 3 OC3 IR STM1 SH 1310 8 Card section on page 4 8 OC12 IR 1310 The OC12 IR 1310 card provides one intermediate or short range OC 12 port and operates at 1310 nm Note The OC12 IR 1310 and OC12 STM4 SH 1310 cards are functionally t...

Page 203: ...elengths 9 in the blue band and 9 in the red band in the 1550 nm range every second wavelength in the ITU grid for 100 GHz spacing dense wavelength division multiplexing DWDM See the 4 12 OC48 ELR STM16 EH 100 GHz Cards section on page 4 25 OC48 ELR 200 GHz The OC48 ELR 200 GHz card provides one long range enhanced OC 48 port and operates in Slot 5 6 12 or 13 This card is available in 18 different...

Page 204: ... Table 2 5 on page 2 4 for a list of cross connect cards that are compatible with each optical card Note Yes indicates that this card is fully or partially supported by the indicated software release Refer to the individual card reference section for more information about software limitations for this card 15454_MRC 12 The 15454_MRC 12 card provides up to twelve OC 3 or OC 12 ports or up to four ...

Page 205: ...ny slot card operation use the XC10G or XC VXC 10G card the TCC TCC2 TCC2P card Software R3 1 or later and the 15454 SA ANSI or 154545 SA HD shelf assembly Note that the TCC card is not compatible with Software 4 5 or later Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes OC48 LR STM16 LH AS 15503 3 To enable OC 192 and OC 48 any slot card operation use the XC10G or XC VXC 10G card the TCC TCC2 TCC2P c...

Page 206: ...onconcatenated STS 1 or concatenated STS 1 or STS 3c payloads Figure 4 1 shows the OC3 IR 4 STM1 SH 1310 faceplate and a block diagram of the card Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on Statement 293 Note The OC3 IR 4 SH 1310 and OC3 IR 4 STM1 SH 1310 cards are functionally the same Figure 4 1 OC3 IR 4 STM1 SH 1310 Fac...

Page 207: ...terminates the DCC GCC 4 2 1 OC3 IR 4 STM1 SH 1310 Card Level Indicators Table 4 3 describes the three card level LED indicators on the OC3 IR 4 STM1 SH 1310 card 4 2 2 OC3 IR 4 STM1 SH 1310 Port Level Indicators Eight bicolor LEDs show the status per port The LEDs are green if the port is available to carry traffic is provisioned as in service and is part of a protection group in the active mode ...

Page 208: ...single mode fiber span The card supports VT nonconcatenated STS 1 or concatenated STS 3C payloads Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on Statement 293 Figure 4 2 shows the card faceplate and block diagram Figure 4 2 OC3IR STM1 SH 1310 8 Faceplate and Block Diagram uP bus uP Flash RAM B a c k p l a n e Optical Transceiv...

Page 209: ... 1310 8 Port Level Indicators Eight bicolor LEDs show the status per port The LEDs show green if the port is available to carry traffic is provisioned as in service is part of a protection group or is in the active mode You can also find the status of the eight card ports by using the LCD screen on the ONS 15454 fan tray assembly Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot the screen d...

Page 210: ... for the laser to be on Statement 293 Note The OC12 IR 1310 and OC12 STM4 SH 1310 cards are functionally the same Figure 4 3 OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 Faceplate and Block Diagram You can install the OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 and provision the card as a drop card or span card in a two fiber BLSR path protection or ADM linear configuration The OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 card interf...

Page 211: ...hardware specifications see the A 6 4 OC12 LR STM4 LH 1310 Card Specifications section on page A 31 See Table 4 2 on page 4 5 for optical card compatibility The OC12 LR STM4 LH 1310 card provides one long range SONET OC 12 port per card compliant with ITU T G 707 ITU T G 957 and Telcordia GR 253 CORE The port operates at 622 08 Mbps over a single mode fiber span The card supports VT nonconcatenate...

Page 212: ...features a 1310 nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector labeled on the card faceplate The card uses SC optical connections and supports 1 1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection The OC12 LR STM4 LH 1310 card detects LOS LOF LOP AIS L and RDI L conditions Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a description of these conditions The card also counts section and li...

Page 213: ...tes at 622 08 Mbps over a single mode fiber span The card supports VT nonconcatenated STS 1 or concatenated STS 3c STS 6c or STS 12c payloads Figure 4 5 shows the OC12 LR STM4 LH 1550 faceplate and a block diagram of the card Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on Statement 293 Note The OC12 LR 1550 and OC12 LR STM4 LH...

Page 214: ...50 nm and contains a transmit and receive connector labeled on the card faceplate The OC12 LR STM4 LH 1550 uses SC optical connections and supports 1 1 bidirectional or unidirectional protection switching The OC12 LR STM4 LH 1550 detects LOS LOF LOP AIS L and RDI L conditions The card also counts section and line BIT errors 4 6 1 OC12 LR STM4 LH 1550 Card Level Indicators Table 4 7 describes the t...

Page 215: ...22 08 Mbps over a single mode fiber span The card supports VT nonconcatenated STS 1 or concatenated STS 1 STS 3c STS 6c or STS 12c payloads Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on Statement 293 Figure 4 6 shows the OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 4 faceplate and a block diagram of the card Table 4 7 OC12 LR STM4 LH 1550 Card Level...

Page 216: ... counts section and line BIP errors To enable BLSR the OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 4 card extracts the K1 and K2 bytes from the SONET overhead and processes them to switch accordingly The DCC GCC bytes are forwarded to the TCC2 TCC2P card which terminates the DCC GCC Note If you ever expect to upgrade an OC 12 STM 4 ring to a higher bit rate you should not put an OC12 IR STM4 SH 1310 4 card in that ring ...

Page 217: ...provides one intermediate range SONET OC 48 port per card compliant with Telcordia GR 253 CORE Each port operates at 2 49 Gbps over a single mode fiber span The card supports VT nonconcatenated STS 1 or concatenated STS 3c STS 6c STS 12c or STS 48c payloads Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on Statement 293 Figure 4 ...

Page 218: ... 1310 nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector labeled on the card faceplate The OC48 IR 1310 uses SC connectors The card supports 1 1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching The OC48 IR 1310 detects LOS LOF LOP AIS L and RDI L conditions The card also counts section and line BIP errors 4 8 1 OC48 IR 1310 Card Level Indicators Table 4 9 describes the three card level LE...

Page 219: ...erates at 2 49 Gbps over a single mode fiber span The card supports VT nonconcatenated STS 1 or concatenated STS 3c STS 6c STS 12c or STS 48c payloads Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on Statement 293 Figure 4 8 shows the OC48 LR 1550 faceplate and a block diagram of the card Table 4 9 OC48 IR 1310 Card Level Indica...

Page 220: ...es a 1550 nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector labeled on the card faceplate The card uses SC connectors and it supports 1 1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching The OC48 LR 1550 detects LOS LOF LOP AIS L and RDI L conditions The card also counts section and line BIP errors 4 9 1 OC48 LR 1550 Card Level Indicators Table 4 10 describes the three card level LEDs on...

Page 221: ...er a single mode fiber span The card supports VT nonconcatenated STS 1 or concatenated STS 3c STS 6c STS 12c or STS 48c payloads Figure 4 9 shows the OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 faceplate and a block diagram of the card Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on Statement 293 Table 4 10 OC48 LR 1550 Card Level Indicators Card...

Page 222: ...10 nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector labeled on the card faceplate The OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 uses SC connectors The card supports 1 1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching The OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 detects LOS LOF LOP AIS L and RDI L conditions The card also counts section and line BIP errors 4 10 1 OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 Card Level Indicators Table 4 1...

Page 223: ...Gbps over a single mode fiber span The card supports VT nonconcatenated STS 1 or concatenated STS 3c STS 6c STS 12c or STS 48c payloads Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on Statement 293 Figure 4 10 shows a block diagram and the faceplate of the OC48 LR STM16 LH AS 1550 card Table 4 11 OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 Card L...

Page 224: ...ort features a 1550 nm laser and contains a transmit and receive connector labeled on the card faceplate The card uses SC connectors and it supports 1 1 unidirectional and bidirectional protection switching The OC48 LR STM16 LH AS 1550 detects LOS LOF LOP AIS L and RDI L conditions The card also counts section and line BIP errors 4 11 1 OC48 LR STM16 LH AS 1550 Card Level Indicators Table 4 12 des...

Page 225: ...692 and ITU T G 958 The port operates at 2 49 Gbps over a single mode fiber span The card carries VT concatenated STS 1 and nonconcatenated STS 1 STS 3c STS 6c STS 12c or STS 48c payloads Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on Statement 293 Figure 4 11 shows the OC48 ELR STM16 EH 100 GHz faceplate and a block diagram o...

Page 226: ...16 DWDM solution You can install the OC48 ELR STM16 EH 100 GHz cards in Slots 5 6 12 and 13 and provision the card as a drop or span card in a two fiber or four fiber BLSR path protection or ADM linear configuration Each OC48 ELR STM16 EH 100 GHz card uses extended long reach optics operating individually within the ITU T 100 GHz grid The OC 48 DWDM cards are intended to be used in applications wi...

Page 227: ... Card Specifications section on page A 38 See Table 4 2 on page 4 5 for optical card compatibility Eighteen distinct OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards provide the ONS 15454 DWDM channel plan Each OC48 ELR 200 GHz card provides one SONET OC 48 port that is compliant with Telcordia GR 253 CORE The port operates at 2 49 Gbps over a single mode fiber span The card carries VT concatenated STS 1 or nonconcatenated...

Page 228: ...ended long reach optics operating individually within the ITU T 200 GHz grid The OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards are intended to be used in applications with long unregenerated spans of up to 200 km 124 miles with mid span amplification These transmission distances are achieved through the use of inexpensive optical amplifiers flat gain amplifiers such as EDFAs Using collocated amplification distances up t...

Page 229: ...n tray assembly Use the LCD to quickly view the status of any port or card slot the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot 4 14 OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 Card Note For hardware specifications see the A 6 13 OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 Card Specifications section on page A 39 See Table 4 2 on page 4 5 for optical card compatibility The OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 card provide...

Page 230: ...plate The card uses a dual SC connector for optical cable termination The card supports 1 1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection It also supports 1 1 protection in four fiber BLSR applications where both span switching and ring switching might occur The OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 card detects SF LOS or LOF conditions on the optical facility Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting ...

Page 231: ...ver unamplified distances up to 40 km 25 miles with SMF 28 fiber limited by loss and or dispersion The card supports VT nonconcatenated STS 1 or concatenated payloads Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on Statement 293 Figure 4 14 shows the OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550 faceplate and block diagram Table 4 15 OC192 SR STM64 I...

Page 232: ...or labeled on the card faceplate The card uses a dual SC connector for optical cable termination The card supports 1 1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection It also supports 1 1 protection in four fiber BLSR applications where both span switching and ring switching might occur The OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550 card detects SF LOS or LOF conditions on the optical facility Refer to the Cisco...

Page 233: ...pes of fiber such as C SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and or dispersion The card supports VT nonconcatenated STS 1 or concatenated payloads There are two versions of the OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 The earliest version has the product ID 15454 OC192LR1550 and the latest card s product ID is 15454 OC192 LR2 These cards have slight specification differences that are noted throughout ...

Page 234: ...f the card Figure 4 15 OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 15454 OC192LR1550 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 4 16 shows an enlarged view of the faceplate warning for 15454 OC192 LR2 Demux CDR Flash SRAM Optical transceiver DAC x 8 ADC x 8 Dig Pol x 2 Mux BTC ASIC STS OC 192 SCL Processor 61361 B a c k p l a n e Mux CK Mpy Optical transceiver Mux STS OC 192 SCL FAIL ACT STBY SF DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATI...

Page 235: ...1550 15454 OC192LR1550 Faceplate Figure 4 17 shows the OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 15454 OC192 LR2 faceplate and a block diagram of the card DANGER INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION MAY BE EMITTED FROM THE END OF UNTERMINATED FIBER CABLE OR CONNECTOR DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS TX MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL 10dBm RX 67465 Class 1M IEC Class 1 CDRH ...

Page 236: ...OC192 LR2 Faceplate and Block Diagram Figure 4 18 shows an enlarged view of the faceplate warning on 15454 OC192LR1550 Demux CDR Flash SRAM Optical transceiver ADC x 8 Mux BTC ASIC STS OC 192 STM 64 SCL Processor 115222 B a c k p l a n e Mux CK Mpy Optical transceiver Mux STS OC 192 STM 64 SCL FAIL ACT STBY SF TX 1 RX MAX INPUT POWER LEVEL 7 dBm RX 1550 ...

Page 237: ...transmit to receive Tx to Rx connection that is not attenuated damages the receiver You can install OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 cards in Slots 5 6 12 and 13 and provision the card as a drop or span card in a two fiber or four fiber BLSR path protection ADM linear configuration or as a regenerator for longer span reaches COMPLI E S WI T H 21 CFR 1040 1 0 AND 1040 1 1 EXCEPT FOR DEVI A TI O NS PURSUANT T...

Page 238: ... 1550 4 dBm to 7 dBm is 6 dB lower than in L 64 2b of the 10 2000 prepublished unedited version of ITU T G 691 10 dBm to 13 dBm However the total attenuation range of the optical path 22 to 16 dB is maintained by the optical receiver sensitivity range of the OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 7 dBm to 24 dBm This sensitivity range outperforms the specification in L 64 2b of the 10 2000 prepublished unedited v...

Page 239: ... miles with different types of fiber such as C SMF or dispersion compensated fiber limited by loss and or dispersion Warning The laser is on when the optical card is booted The port does not have to be in service for the laser to be on Statement 293 Note Longer distances are possible in an amplified system using dispersion compensation The card supports VT nonconcatenated STS 1 or concatenated pay...

Page 240: ...near configuration or also as a regenerator for longer span reaches The OC192 LR STM64 LH ITU 15xx xx port features a laser on a specific wavelength in the 1550 nm range and contains a transmit and receive connector labeled on the card faceplate The card uses a dual SC connector for optical cable termination The card supports 1 1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection It also support...

Page 241: ... card supports VT payloads STS 1 payloads and concatenated payloads at STS 3c STS 6c STS 9c STS 12c STS 18c STS 24c STS 36c or STS 48c signal levels It is fully interoperable with the ONS 15454 G Series Ethernet cards The 15454_MRC 12 port contains a transmit and receive connector labeled on the card faceplate The card supports 1 1 unidirectional and bidirectional facility protection It also suppo...

Page 242: ...H 21 CFR 1040 1 0 AND 1040 1 1 EXCEPT FOR DEVI A TI O NS PURSUANT TO LASER NOTI C E No 50 DATED JULY 26 2001 OC 3 12 48 STM 1 4 16 Port 1 SFP Optical XCVR OC 3 12 STM 1 4 Port 2 SFP Optical XCVR OC 3 12 STM 1 4 Port 3 SFP Optical XCVR OC 3 12 48 STM 1 4 16 Port 4 SFP Optical XCVR OC 3 12 STM 1 4 Port 5 SFP Optical XCVR OC 3 12 STM 1 4 Port 6 SFP Optical XCVR OC 3 12 48 STM 1 4 16 Port 7 SFP Optica...

Page 243: ...1 4 7 and 10 are the only ports usable as OC 12 If Port 4 is used as an OC 12 Ports 2 and 3 are disabled If Port 7 is used as an OC 12 Ports 5 6 and 8 are disabled If Port 10 is used as an OC 12 Ports 9 11 and 12 are disabled Any port can be used as an OC 3 as long as all of the above rules are followed STS 192 Ports 1 4 7 and 10 are the only ports usable as OC 48 If Port 4 is used as an OC 48 Por...

Page 244: ...lumn shows the total number of ports that can be used with each bandwidth scheme Table 4 20 Line Rate Configurations Per 15454_MRC 12 Port Based on Available Bandwidth MRC 12Port Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Ports Used Total STSs Permitted Rate s OC 3 OC 1 2 OC 4 8 OC 3 OC 1 2 OC 3 OC 1 2 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 3 OC 1 2 OC 3 OC 1 2 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 3 OC 1 2 OC 3 OC 1 2 OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 3 O...

Page 245: ...3 3 3 3 7 156 48 48 48 12 12 12 12 7 192 48 48 48 48 4 192 STS 192 Available Bandwidth when installing additional SFPs from the bottom port to the top port 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 48 9 72 3 3 3 3 12 12 12 12 48 9 108 3 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 48 9 135 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 48 9 144 12 12 12 12 3 3 3 3 48 9 108 12 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 48 9 81 3 3 3 3 48 48 6 108 3 12 12 12 48 48 6 135 12 12 12 12 48 48 6 144 12 ...

Page 246: ...as four physical connector adapters with two fibers per connector adapter Tx and Rx The card supports VT payloads STS 1 payloads and concatenated payloads at STS 3c STS 6c STS 9c STS 12c STS 18c STS 24c STS 36c or STS 48c signal levels It is fully interoperable with the ONS 15454 G Series Ethernet cards Each MRC 2 5G 4 port contains a transmit and receive connector labeled on the card faceplate Th...

Page 247: ...an amplified system using dispersion compensation Figure 4 22 shows the MRC 2 5G 4 faceplate and block diagram Figure 4 22 MRC 2 5G 4 Card Faceplate and Block Diagram 159815 OC 3 12 48 STM 1 4 16 Port 1 SFP Optical XCVR OC 3 12 STM 1 4 Port 2 SFP Optical XCVR OC 3 12 STM 1 4 Port 3 SFP Optical XCVR OC 3 12 STM 1 4 16 Port 4 SFP Optical XCVR Main SCL Intfc Protect SCL Intfc Amazon ASIC B a c k p l ...

Page 248: ...SFP ports can be used as OC 3 STM 1 OC 12 STM 4 and OC 48 STM 16 The following rules apply for port bandwidth allocation STS 12 maximum backplane bandwidth Port 1 is the only port that is usable as an OC 12 STM 4 If Port 1 is used as an OC 12 STM 4 all other ports are disabled Each of the four ports can be used as OC 3 STM 1 STS 48 maximum backplane bandwidth Port 1 is the only port that is usable...

Page 249: ...port or card slot the screen displays the number and severity of alarms for a given port or slot Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide for a complete description of the alarm messages Table 4 23 Line Rate Configurations Per 15454_MRC 4 Port Based on Available Bandwidth MRC 4 Port Number 1 2 3 4 Ports Used Total STSs Permitted Rate s OC 3 OC 12 OC 48 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 OC 3 OC 12 ST...

Page 250: ...cation references can be found for the OC 192 STM 64 interface in ITU T G 691 ITU T G 693 and ITU T G 959 1 and Telcordia GR 253 The optical interface uses a 10 Gbps Form factor Pluggable XFP optical transceiver that plugs into a receptacle on the front of the card The OC192SR1 STM64IO Short Reach card is used only with an SR 1 XFP while the OC192 STM 64 Any Reach card can be provisioned for use w...

Page 251: ... 10 Gbps transport with unregenerated spans of up to 2 0 km A card using the IR 2 XFP is intended to be used in applications requiring 10 Gbps transport with unregenerated spans of up to 40 km A card using the LR 2 XFP is intended to be used in applications requiring 10 Gbps transport with unregenerated spans of up to 80 km XFP Serial EEPROM FLASH DDR SDRAM Transport OH Processor and Backplane I F...

Page 252: ...l optical cards the type of SFP or XFP plugged into the card is displayed in CTC and TL1 Cisco offers SFPs and XFPs as separate orderable products 4 21 1 Compatibility by Card Table 4 26 lists Cisco ONS 15454 optical cards and their compatible SFPs and XFPs Caution Only use SFPs and XFPs certified for use in Cisco Optical Networking Systems ONSs The qualified Cisco SFP and XFP pluggable module s t...

Page 253: ... ONS SC Z3 1470 ONS SC Z3 1490 ONS SC Z3 1510 ONS SC Z3 1530 ONS SC Z3 1550 ONS SC Z3 1570 ONS SC Z3 1590 ONS SC Z3 1610 ONS SE Z1 ONS SC 155 EL 1 ONS SC 2G 28 7 ONS SC 2G 33 4 ONS SC 2G 41 3 ONS SC 2G 49 3 and ONS SC 2G 57 3 are supported from Release 8 5 and later 10 2307 02 10 2155 01 through 10 2186 01 10 1996 01 through 10 2003 01 10 2004 01 through 10 2011 01 10 1938 01 10 1957 01 10 1937 01...

Page 254: ...o the model type such as SX or LX LH or technology type such as Gigabit Ethernet See the label on the SFP for technology type and model Three latch types are available mylar Figure 4 24 actuator button Figure 4 25 and bail clasp Figure 4 26 Figure 4 24 Mylar Tab SFP Figure 4 25 Actuator Button SFP Figure 4 26 Bail Clasp SFP SFP dimensions are Table 4 27 LED Based SFPs SFPs Cisco Product ID Cisco T...

Page 255: ...ing signaling rates 9 95 Gbps 10 31 Gbps and 10 51 Gbps The XFP integrates the receiver and transmit path The transmit side recovers and retimes the 10 Gbps serial data and passes it to a laser driver The laser driver biases and modulates a 1310 nm or 1550 nm distributed feedback DFB laser enabling data transmission over single mode fiber SMF through an LC connector The receive side recovers and r...

Page 256: ...lsius EXT Extended operating temperature range 23 to185 degrees Fahrenheit 5to 85 degrees Celsius IND Industrial operating temperature range 40 to 185 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 85 degrees Celsius 4 21 4 PPM Provisioning SFPs and XFPs are known as pluggable port modules PPMs in CTC Multirate PPMs for the 15454_MRC 12 card can be provisioned for different line rates in CTC For more information about ...

Page 257: ...into a SONET platform through the use of Ethernet cards This chapter describes the E Series G Series ML Series and CE Series Ethernet cards For installation and card turn up procedures refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide For ML Series configuration information refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide Chapter topics include...

Page 258: ...card provides two IEEE compliant 1000 Mbps ports Gigabit Interface Converters GBICs are separate See the 5 4 E1000 2 Card section on page 5 8 E1000 2 G The E1000 2 G card provides two IEEE compliant 1000 Mbps ports GBICs are separate The E1000 2 G card is compatible with the XC10G and XC VXC 10G cards See the 5 5 E1000 2 G Card section on page 5 11 G1K 4 The G1K 4 card provides four IEEE compliant...

Page 259: ... VXC 10G or XCVT cross connect cards See the 5 12 CE 1000 4 Card section on page 5 27 CE MR 10 The CE MR 10 card provides ten IEEE compliant 10 100 1000 Mbps ports The CE MR 10 card can operate with the XC10G XC VXC 10G or XCVT cross connect cards See the 5 13 CE MR 10 Card section on page 5 30 Table 5 1 Ethernet Cards for the ONS 15454 continued Card Port Description For Additional Information Ta...

Page 260: ...et ports manually Figure 5 1 shows the faceplate and a block diagram of the card Figure 5 1 E100T 12 Faceplate and Block Diagram The E100T 12 Ethernet card provides high throughput low latency packet switching of Ethernet traffic across a SONET network while providing a greater degree of reliability through SONET self healing protection services This Ethernet capability enables network operators t...

Page 261: ...te has two card level LED indicators described in Table 5 3 5 2 3 E100T 12 Port Level Indicators The E100T 12 card has 12 pairs of LEDs one pair for each port to indicate port conditions Table 5 4 lists the port level indicators You can find the status of the E100T 12 card port using the LCD on the ONS 15454 fan tray assembly Use the LCD to view the status of any port or card slot the screen displ...

Page 262: ...0 Mbps Each card provides 12 switched IEEE 802 3 compliant 10 100BaseT Ethernet ports that can independently detect the speed of an attached device autosense and automatically connect at the appropriate speed The ports autoconfigure to operate at either half or full duplex and determine whether to enable or disable flow control You can also configure Ethernet ports manually Figure 5 2 shows the fa...

Page 263: ...an act independently or as a single Ethernet switch You can create logical SONET ports by provisioning a number of STS channels to the packet switch entity within the ONS 15454 Logical ports can be created with a bandwidth granularity of STS 1 The ONS 15454 supports STS 1 STS 3c STS 6c or STS 12c circuit sizes 5 3 2 E100T G Card Level Indicators The E100T G card faceplate has two card level LED in...

Page 264: ...nnections Each port supports full duplex operation The E1000 2 card uses GBIC modular receptacles for the optical interfaces For details see the 5 14 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs section on page 5 33 Figure 5 3 shows the card faceplate and a block diagram of the card Table 5 6 E100T G Port Level Indicators LED State Description Yellow Active Port is active transmitting or receiving data By default...

Page 265: ...ween its Ethernet interfaces and SONET interfaces on the ONS 15454 The IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag logically isolates traffic typically subscribers Multiple E Series Ethernet cards installed in an ONS 15454 can act together as a single switching entity or as independent single switches supporting a variety of SONET port configurations You can create logical SONET ports by provisioning STS channels to the...

Page 266: ... When the LED flashes amber it does so at a rate proportional to the level of traffic being received and transmitted over the port 5 4 4 Cross Connect Compatibility The E1000 2 is compatible with XCVT cards The XC10G and XC VXC 10G cards require the E1000 2 G card Table 5 7 E1000 2 Card Level Indicators Card Level Indicators Description FAIL LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card process...

Page 267: ...5454 uses E1000 2 G cards for Gigabit Ethernet 1000 Mbps The E1000 2 G card provides two IEEE compliant 1000 Mbps ports for high capacity customer LAN interconnections Each port supports full duplex operation The E1000 2 G card uses GBIC modular receptacles for the optical interfaces For details see the 5 14 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs section on page 5 33 Figure 5 4 shows the card faceplate and ...

Page 268: ...bles efficient transport and co existence of traditional TDM traffic with packet switched data traffic Each E1000 2 G card supports standards based Layer 2 Ethernet switching between its Ethernet interfaces and SONET interfaces on the ONS 15454 The IEEE 802 1Q VLAN tag logically isolates traffic typically subscribers Multiple E Series Ethernet cards installed in an ONS 15454 can act together as a ...

Page 269: ...s carrying unidirectional traffic The amber port ACT LED flashes at a rate proportional to the level of traffic being received and transmitted over the port 5 5 3 Cross Connect Compatibility The E1000 2 G is compatible with the XCVT XC10G and XC VXC 10G cards You can install the card in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 Table 5 9 E1000 2 G Card Level Indicators Card Level Indicators Description FAIL LED R...

Page 270: ...e 5 14 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs section on page 5 33 Figure 5 5 shows the card faceplate and the block diagram of the card Figure 5 5 G1K 4 Faceplate and Block Diagram The G1K 4 Gigabit Ethernet card provides high throughput low latency transport of Ethernet encapsulated traffic IP and other Layer 2 or Layer 3 protocols across a SONET network while providing a greater degree of reliability thr...

Page 271: ... STS 24c circuit is dropped therefore you can easily minimize the impact of this restriction Group the STS 24c circuits together on a card separate from circuits of other sizes The grouped circuits can be dropped on other G Series cards on the ONS 15454 5 6 2 G1K 4 Compatibility The G1K 4 card operates with the XCVT XC10G or XC VXC 10G cards With the XC10G or XC VXC 10G cards you can install the G...

Page 272: ...onfigure to operate at either half or full duplex and can determine whether to enable or disable flow control For ML Series configuration information see the Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide Figure 5 6 shows the card faceplate and block diagram Caution Shielded twisted pair cabling should be used for inter building applications Table 5 ...

Page 273: ... two VCAT groups with each group corresponding to one of the POS ports Each VCAT group must be provisioned with two circuit members An ML Series card supports STS 1c 2v STS 3c 2v and STS 12c 2v To configure an ML Series card SONET VCAT circuit refer to the Create Circuits and VT Tunnels chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide 5 7 1 ML100T 12 Card Level Indicators The ML00T 12 card supports ...

Page 274: ...ration for autonegotiation and a maximum bandwidth of 200 Mbps per port and 2 488 Gbps per card For ML Series configuration information see the Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide Figure 5 7 shows the card faceplate and block diagram Table 5 13 ML100T 12 Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description FAIL LED Red The red FAIL LED indica...

Page 275: ...concatenation VCAT of SONET circuits and a software link capacity adjustment scheme SW LCAS The ML Series cards support a maximum of two VCAT groups with each group corresponding to one of the POS ports Each VCAT group must be provisioned with two circuit members An ML Series card supports STS 1c 2v STS 3c 2v and STS 12c 2v To configure an ML Series card SONET VCAT circuit refer to the Create Circ...

Page 276: ...see the 5 14 Ethernet Card GBICs and SFPs section on page 5 33 Figure 5 8 shows the ML1000 2 card faceplate and block diagram Table 5 15 ML100X 8 Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description FAIL LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the ML100 FX card As part of the boot sequence the FAIL LED is turned on un...

Page 277: ...each group corresponding to one of the POS ports Each VCAT group must be provisioned with two circuit members An ML Series card supports STS 1c 2v STS 3c 2v and STS 12c 2v To configure an ML Series card SONET VCAT circuit refer to the Create Circuits and VT Tunnels chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide 5 9 1 ML1000 2 Card Level Indicators The ML1000 2 card faceplate has two card level LED...

Page 278: ...interfaces are STS 12c STS 24c STS 48c and STS 96c A maximum aggregate of OC 192 of bandwidth can terminate on a single card The RPR interface on ML MR 10 supports only framed generic framing procedure GFP F encapsulation for SONET Table 5 17 ML1000 2 Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description SF LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic ...

Page 279: ...rd protection refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 and Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide The ML MR 10 card supports the Version Up feature which allows a user to independently upgrade ML MR 10 cards as part of an overall software upgrade process With this feature enabled the user first upgrades all the cards in the node that are not ML MR 10 cards then in a second ...

Page 280: ... XCVT card Caution Fan tray assembly 15454 CC FTA ANSI shelf must be installed in a shelf where an ML MR 10 card is installed Table 5 19 ML MR 10 Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description FAIL LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the ML MR 10 card As part of the boot sequence the FAIL LED is turned on un...

Page 281: ...T 8 card also supports the link capacity adjustment scheme LCAS which allows hitless dynamic adjustment of SONET link bandwidth The CE 100T 8 card s LCAS is hardware based but the CE 100T 8 also supports SW LCAS This makes it compatible with the ONS 15454 SDH ML Series card which supports only SW LCAS and does not support the standard hardware based LCAS SW LCAS is supported when a circuit from th...

Page 282: ...S 12 frame for transport over the SONET network by means of the Bridging Convergence Transmission BTC ASIC In the Egress direction SONET to Ethernet the FPGA extracts four STS 3 SPEs from the STS 12 frame it receives from the BTC and sends each of the STS 3s to the ET3 mappers The STS 3 SONET SPE carrying GFP or PPP HDLC encapsulated Ethernet frames is then extracted and buffered in Ethermap s ext...

Page 283: ...cations section on page A 50 Table 5 21 CE 100T 8 Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description SF LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the CE 100T 8 card As part of the boot sequence the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational ACT LED Green The green ACT LED provides the operatio...

Page 284: ...T circuit refer to the Create Circuits and Tunnels chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide The CE 1000 4 card provides multiple management options through Cisco Transport Controller CTC Cisco Transport Manager CTM Transaction Language 1 TL1 and Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP The CE 1000 4 card supports the software link capacity adjustment scheme SW LCAS This makes it compatible wi...

Page 285: ...it fiber routed Supports 2 fiber on VCAT circuits that are common fiber routed Differential delay compensation is automatically enabled on VCAT circuits that are diverse split fiber routed and disabled on VCAT circuits that are common fiber routed Figure 5 11 shows the CE 1000 4 card faceplate and block diagram Figure 5 11 CE 1000 4 Faceplate and Block Diagram 5 12 1 CE 1000 4 Card Level Indicator...

Page 286: ... 7 CE MR 10 Card Specifications section on page A 51 Table 5 23 CE 1000 4 Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description FAIL LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the CE 1000 4 card As part of the boot sequence the FAIL LED is turned on until the software deems the card operational ACT LED Green The green ACT...

Page 287: ... capacity adjustment scheme LCAS which allows hitless dynamic adjustment of SONET link bandwidth The CE MR 10 card s LCAS is hardware based but the CE MR 10 also supports software LCAS SW LCAS This makes it compatible with ML Series cards which support only SW LCAS along with G Series and CE Series cards The CE MR 10 card also supports the non link capacity adjustment scheme non LCAS The CE MR 10 ...

Page 288: ... has two card level LED indicators described in Table 5 25 159724 Marvell 10G MAC MV82119 35mm SP14 FCC 2x SP14 SP14 MP41 FPGA B a c k p l a n e BCM5482S PHY SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP SFP BCM5482S PHY BCM5482S PHY BCM5482S PHY BCM5482S PHY FCC 2x SP14 MPC8555 Subsystem Super Carrera ASIC MEM QDR2 1Mx36 IBPIA IBPIA MP4E FPGA MEM QDR2 1Mx36 MEM RLDRAM2 8Mx36 MEM RLDRAM2 8Mx36 FAIL ACT LINK...

Page 289: ...ater G Series cards can also be equipped with dense wavelength division multiplexing DWDM and coarse wavelength division multiplexing CWDM GBICs to function as Gigabit Ethernet transponders Table 5 25 CE MR 10 Card Level Indicators Card Level LEDs Description FAIL LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready or that a catastrophic software failure occurred on the card As...

Page 290: ... ONS GC GE SX 1000BASE L X E1000 2 G G1K 4 CE 1000 4 Long reach Single mode fiber up to 5 km long 15454E GBIC LX 15454 GBIC LX ONS GC GE LX 1000BASE Z X G1K 4 CE 1000 4 Extra long reach Single mode fiber up to 70 km long 15454E GBIC ZX 15454 GBIC ZX ONS GC GE ZX Table 5 28 Available SFPs and XFPs SFP XFP Associated Cards Application Fiber Product Number 1000BASE SX ML1000 2 Short reach Multimode f...

Page 291: ...e 5 13 GBIC dimensions are Height 0 39 in 1 cm Width 1 18 in 3 cm Depth 2 56 in 6 5 cm GBIC temperature ranges are COM Commercial operating temperature range 5 degrees C to 70 degrees C 23 degrees F to 158 degrees F EXT Extended operating temperature range 5 degrees C to 85 degrees C 23 degrees F to 185 degrees F IND Industrial operating temperature range 40 degrees C to 85 degrees C 40 degrees F ...

Page 292: ... DWDM and CWDM GBICs receive across the full 1300 nm and 1500 nm bands which includes all CWDM DWDM LX LH ZX wavelengths but transmit on one specified wavelength This capability can be exploited in some of the G Series transponding modes by receiving wavelengths that do not match the specific transmission wavelength Note G1K 4 cards with the Common Language Equipment Identification CLEI code of WM...

Page 293: ... Device A G Series card equipped with CWDM or DWDM GBICs supports the delivery of unprotected Gigabit Ethernet service over Metro DWDM Figure 5 15 It can be used in short haul and long haul applications Table 5 30 Supported Wavelengths for DWDM GBICs Blue Band 1530 33 nm 1531 12 nm 1531 90 nm 1532 68 nm 1534 25 nm 1535 04 nm 1535 82 nm 1536 61 nm 1538 19 nm 1538 98 nm 1539 77 nm 1540 56 nm 1542 14...

Page 294: ... available is a mylar tab Figure 5 16 a second type of latch available is an actuator button Figure 5 17 and a third type of latch is a bail clasp Figure 5 18 SFP dimensions are Height 0 03 in 8 5 mm Width 0 53 in 13 4 mm Depth 2 22 in 56 5 mm SFP temperature ranges for are COM Commercial operating temperature range 5 degrees C to 70 degrees C 23 degrees F to 158 degrees F EXT Extended operating t...

Page 295: ...5 39 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5 14 4 SFP Description Figure 5 17 Actuator Button SFP Figure 5 18 Bail Clasp SFP 63066 63067 ...

Page 296: ...5 40 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 5 Ethernet Cards 5 14 4 SFP Description ...

Page 297: ...y step circuit configuration procedures refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter topics include 6 1 FC_MR 4 Card Overview page 6 1 6 2 FC_MR 4 Card Modes page 6 4 6 3 FC_MR 4 Card Application page 6 7 6 4 FC_MR 4 Card GBICs page 6 8 6 1 FC_MR 4 Card Overview Note For hardware specifications see the A 8 Storage Access Networking Card Specifications section on page A 53 The FC_MR 4 card ...

Page 298: ...brate SONET SDH containers as small as STS 18c VC4 6v full rate Four 2 125 Gbps FC channels can be mapped into one of the following SONET containers as small as STS1 1v subrate SDH containers as small as VC4 1v subrate SONET SDH containers as small as STS 36c VC4 12v full rate Frame encapsulation ITU T G 7041 transparent generic framing procedure GFP T High order SONET SDH VCAT support STS1 Xv and...

Page 299: ... MEMORY QUICKSILVER VCAT PROCESSOR Decode and Control PLD GBIC OPTICS GBIC OPTICS GBIC OPTICS GBIC OPTICS RUDRA FPGA 1 Rx Tx 2 Rx Tx 4 Rx Tx 3 Rx Tx FAIL ACT FC_MR 4 ACT LNK ACT LNK ACT LNK ACT LNK B A C K P L A N E Table 6 1 FC_MR 4 Card Level Indicators Card Level Indicators Description FAIL LED Red The red FAIL LED indicates that the card processor is not ready Replace the card if the red FAIL ...

Page 300: ...installed in Slots 1 to 6 and 12 to 17 when used with the XC10G and XC VXC 10G cards When the shelf uses the XCVT card the FC_MR 4 can be used in only the high speed slots 5 6 and 12 13 The FC_MR 4 card can be provisioned as part of any valid ONS 15454 SONET SDH network topology such as a path protection bidirectional line switched ring BLSR or linear network topologies The FC_MR 4 card is compati...

Page 301: ...ere X is 1 to 48 STS 3c Xv where X is 1 to 16 VC4 Xv where X is 1 to 16 6 2 2 2 SW LCAS VCAT group VCG is reconfigurable when the software link capacity adjustment scheme SW LCAS is enabled as follows Out of service OOS and out of group OOG members can be removed from VCG Members with deleted cross connects can be removed from VCGs Errored members can be autonomously removed from VCGs Degraded ban...

Page 302: ...ossibly processing delays between members The overall VCG propagation delay corresponds to that of the slowest member The VCAT differential delay is the relative arrival time measurement between members of a VCG The FC_MR 4 card is able to handle VCAT differential delay and provides these associated features Supports a maximum of 122 ms of delay difference between the shortest and longest paths Su...

Page 303: ... as small as STS 1 subrate with a minimum of STS 18c VC4 6v for full rate Four 2 125 Gbps FC channels can be mapped into containers as small as STS 1 sub rate with a minimum of STS 36c VC4 12v for full rate The FC_MR 4 card incorporates features optimized for carrier class applications such as Carrier class Fibre Channel FICON 50 ms of switch time through SONET SDH protection as specified in Telco...

Page 304: ...atenated Circuits section on page 11 34 for more information about VCAT circuits 6 4 FC_MR 4 Card GBICs The FC_MR 4 uses pluggable GBICs for client interfaces Table 6 2 lists GBICs that are compatible with the FC_MR 4 card See the 5 14 2 GBIC Description section on page 5 35 for more information Table 6 2 GBIC Compatibility Card Compatible GBIC or SFP Cisco Product ID Cisco Top Assembly Number TAN...

Page 305: ... and Figure 7 2 on page 7 3 shows a 1 N protection configuration This section covers the general concept of electrical card protection Specific electrical card protection schemes depend on the type of electrical card as well as the electrical interface assembly EIA type used on the ONS 15454 backplane Table 7 4 on page 7 6 details the specific electrical card protection schemes Note See Table 1 1 ...

Page 306: ...n an odd numbered slot Slot 1 is protecting Slot 2 Slot 3 is protecting Slot 4 Slot 5 is protecting Slot 6 Slot 17 is protecting Slot 16 Slot 15 is protecting Slot 14 and Slot 13 is protecting Slot 12 Figure 7 1 Example ONS 15454 Cards in a 1 1 Protection Configuration SMB EIA Table 7 1 provides supported 1 1 protection by electrical card type 33384 1 1 Protection TCC XC10G AIC Optional XC10G TCC ...

Page 307: ...ach side of the shelf assembly has only one card protecting all of the cards on that side Figure 7 2 Example ONS 15454 Cards in a 1 N Protection Configuration SMB EIA Table 7 2 provides the supported 1 N configurations by electrical card as well as the card types that can be used for working and protection cards Additional engineering rules for 1 N card deployments will be covered in the following...

Page 308: ...e following rules apply to ported 1 N protection groups in the ONS 15454 Working and protect card groups must reside in the same card bank Side A or Side B The 1 N protect card must reside in Slot 3 for Side A and Slot 15 for Side B DS3 EC1 48 DS3 EC1 48 N 2 15 26 3 167 178 15 DS3XM 12 Transmux DS3XM 12 Transmux N 5 1 2 4 5 6 3 12 13 14 16 17 15 DS3XM 12 Transmux DS3XM 12 Transmux N 7 portless9 1 ...

Page 309: ...varying connector size For example because BNC connectors are larger fewer DS3 12 cards can be supported when using a BNC connector Table 7 3 shows the number of connectors per side for each EIA type according to low density and high density interfaces In the tables high density HD cards include the DS3 EC1 48 and DS1 E1 56 cards Low density LD cards include the following DS1 14 DS1N 14 DS3 12 DS3...

Page 310: ...4 Electrical Card Protection By EIA Type Protection Type Card Type Side Standard BNC High Density BNC MiniBNC SMB AMP Champ UBIC V and UBIC H SCSI Unprotected LD Working A 2 4 1 2 4 5 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 6 B 14 16 13 14 16 17 12 17 12 17 12 17 12 17 HD Working A 1 2 1 2 B 16 17 16 17 1 1 LD Working A 2 4 2 4 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 B 14 16 14 16 12 14 16 12 14 16 12 14 16 12 14 16 LD Protect A 1 3 1 3 1...

Page 311: ...ss connect AIC Cross connect TCC Working Working Working Working TCC Cross connect AIC Cross connect TCC Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working TCC Cross connect AIC Cross connect TCC Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working TCC Cross connect AIC Cross connect TCC Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working...

Page 312: ...lectrical Card Protection and the Backplane Figure 7 4 shows unprotected high density electrical card schemes by EIA type Figure 7 4 Unprotected High Density Electrical Card Schemes for EIA Types TCC Cross connect AIC Cross connect TCC UBIC MiniBNC 124963 Working Working Working Working ...

Page 313: ... Electrical Cards with EIA Types TCC Cross connect AIC Cross connect TCC Working Working Working Working Protect TCC Cross connect AIC Cross connect TCC Working Working Working Working TCC Cross connect AIC Cross connect TCC Working Working Working Working Working Working Standard BNC High Density BNC SMB UBIC AMP Champ MiniBNC Protect Protect Protect Protect Protect Protect Protect 124962 Protect...

Page 314: ...1 cards do not support 1 N protection TCC Cross connect AIC Cross connect TCC Working Working Working Working 1 N Protection 1 N Protection TCC Cross connect AIC Cross connect TCC Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working 1 N Protection 1 N Protection TCC Cross connect AIC Cross connect TCC Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working Working 1 N Pr...

Page 315: ...ed to 24 BNC connectors on the EIA to support up to 12 transmit receive signals These slots can be used with or without equipment protection for DS 3 and EC 1 services 7 2 2 High Density BNC Protection When used with the high density BNC EIA the ONS 15454 supports unprotected 1 1 or 1 N N 4 electrical card protection for DS 3 and EC 1 signals as outlined in Table 7 1 on page 7 2 and Table 7 2 on p...

Page 316: ... 14 transmit receive signals These slots can be used with or without equipment protection for DS 1 DS 3 and EC 1 services For DS 1 services an SMB to wire wrap balun is installed on the SMB ports for termination of the 100 ohm signal 7 2 5 AMP Champ Protection When used with the AMP Champ EIA the ONS 15454 supports unprotected 1 1 or 1 N N 5 electrical card protection for DS 1 signals as outlined ...

Page 317: ...ion can be either revertive or nonrevertive With nonrevertive 1 1 protection when a failure occurs and the signal switches from the working card to the protect card the signal stays switched to the protect card until it is manually switched back Revertive 1 1 protection automatically switches the signal back to the working card when the working card comes back online 1 1 protection is unidirection...

Page 318: ...d leave three ports unprotected Conversely you can assign three ports as protection ports and leave one port unprotected With 1 1 or 1 N protection electrical cards the protect card must protect an entire slot In other words all the ports on the protect card are used in the protection scheme 7 4 Unprotected Cards Unprotected cards are not included in a protection scheme therefore a card failure or...

Page 319: ...nce can only be applied to protect cards in 1 1 configurations Lockouts have the highest priority In a 1 1 configuration you can also apply a lock on to the working port A working port with a lock on applied cannot switch traffic to the protect port in the protection group pair In 1 1 protection groups working or protect ports can have a lock on Note Force and Manual switches do not apply to 1 1 p...

Page 320: ...7 16 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 7 Card Protection 7 5 External Switching Commands ...

Page 321: ...e 8 21 8 9 TCC2 TCC2P Card Database page 8 21 8 10 Software Revert page 8 22 8 1 CTC Software Delivery Methods ONS 15454 provisioning and administration is performed using the CTC software CTC is a Java application that is installed in two locations CTC is stored on the Advanced Timing Communications and Control TCC2 card or the Advanced Timing Communications and Control Plus TCC2P card and it is ...

Page 322: ...C version as the protect CTC version When you activate the new CTC software the TCC2 TCC2P cards store the older CTC version as the protect CTC version and the newer CTC release becomes the working version You can view the software versions that are installed on an ONS 15454 by selecting the Maintenance Software tabs in node view Figure 8 1 Figure 8 1 CTC Software Versions Node View 159507 Softwar...

Page 323: ...he button to remove files stored in the temporary directory If the files are deleted they download the next time you connect to an ONS 15454 Downloading the Java archive JAR files for CTC takes several minutes depending on the bandwidth of the connection between your workstation and the ONS 15454 For example JAR files downloaded from a modem or a data communications channel DCC network link requir...

Page 324: ... files are downloaded automatically to enable you to interact with those nodes The CTC file download occurs only when necessary such as during your first login You cannot interact with nodes on the network that have a software version later than the node that you used to launch CTC Each ONS 15454 can handle up to five concurrent CTC sessions CTC performance can vary depending on the volume of acti...

Page 325: ...ion No Yes No No ONS 15454 Release 4 1 No Yes No No ONS 15454 Release 4 5 No Yes No No ONS 15454 Release 4 6 No Yes Yes No ONS 15454 Release 5 0 No No Yes No ONS 15454 Release 6 0 No No Yes No ONS 15454 Release 7 0 No No Yes Yes ONS 15454 Release 7 2 No No Yes Yes ONS 15454 Release 8 0 No No No Yes ONS 15454 Release 8 5 No No No Yes Table 8 2 Computer Requirements for CTC Area Requirements Notes P...

Page 326: ...ning software R7 0 or R7 2 Cisco recommends JRE 1 4 2 or JRE 5 0 If CTC must be launched directly from nodes running software R5 0 or R6 0 Cisco recommends JRE 1 4 2 If CTC must be launched directly from nodes running software earlier than R5 0 Cisco recommends JRE 1 3 1_02 Web browser PC Internet Explorer 6 x or Netscape 7 x UNIX Workstation Mozilla 1 7 Netscape 4 76 Netscape 7 x For the PC use J...

Page 327: ...he RJ 45 LAN port on the TCC2 TCC2P card The LAN pins on the ONS 15454 backplane A hub or switch to which the ONS 15454 is connected If you do not use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP you must change the computer IP address subnet mask and default router or use automatic host detection Corporate LAN Refers to a connection to the ONS 15454 through a corporate or network operations center NO...

Page 328: ...ess is a violation of the law This service can be monitored for administrative and security reasons By proceeding you consent to this monitoring The ONS 15600 allows a user with Superuser privileges to modify the default login warning message and save it to a node using the Provisioning Security Legal Disclaimer HTML tab The login warning message field allows up to 250 characters of text 1600 char...

Page 329: ... and the security level of the user software version and the network element default setup 8 6 1 1 CTC Card Colors The graphic area of the CTC window depicts the ONS 15454 shelf assembly The colors of the cards in the graphic reflect the real time status of the physical card and slot Table 8 4 159506 Menu bar Top pane Tool bar Status area Graphic area Tabs Status bar Subtabs Bottom pane Table 8 4 ...

Page 330: ...k Port is in a loopback state On the card in node view a line between ports indicates that the port is in terminal or facility loopback see Figure 8 4 on page 8 11 and Figure 8 5 on page 8 11 Traffic is carried and alarm reporting is suppressed Raised fault conditions whether or not their alarms are reported can be retrieved on the CTC Conditions tab or by using the TL1 RTRV COND command Blue OOS ...

Page 331: ...provisioned The port transmits a signal and displays alarms loopbacks are not allowed Violet OOS AU AINS Out of Service and Autonomous Automatic In Service The port is out of service but traffic is carried Alarm reporting is suppressed The node monitors the ports for an error free signal After an error free signal is detected the port stays in OOS AU AINS state for the duration of the soak period ...

Page 332: ...tes edits and maps circuits and rolls Circuits Rolls Provisioning Provisions the ONS 15454 node General Ether Bridge Network OSI BLSR Protection Security SNMP Comm Channels Timing Alarm Profiles Cross Connect Defaults WDM ANS Inventory Provides inventory information part number serial number Common Language Equipment Identification CLEI codes for cards installed in the node Allows you to delete an...

Page 333: ...an in the graphic area displays information about the node and span in the status area 8 6 2 1 Network View Tabs Table 8 8 lists the tabs and subtabs available in network view 96939 Bold letters indicate login node asterisk indicates topology host Icon color indicates node status Dots indicate selected node Table 8 8 Network View Tabs and Subtabs Tab Description Subtabs Alarms Lists current alarms...

Page 334: ...rity Alarm Profiles BLSR Overhead Circuits Server Trails VLAN DB Profile Maintenance Displays the working and protect software versions and allows software to be downloaded retrieves Open Shortest Path First OSPF node information and displays the list of automatic power control APC domains for a network Software Diagnostic APC Table 8 8 Network View Tabs and Subtabs continued Tab Description Subta...

Page 335: ...ps display nodes in icon form instead of detailed form meaning the nodes appear as rectangles with ports on the sides Refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide for more information about consolidated links 8 6 3 Card View The card view provides information about individual ONS 15454 cards Use this window to perform card specific maintenance and provisioning Figure 8 7 A graphic showing the port...

Page 336: ...n shown under each tab depend on the card type selected The Performance tab is not available for the Alarm Interface Controller International AIC I cards 159504 Card identification and status Table 8 12 Card View Tabs and Subtabs Tab Description Subtabs Alarms Lists current alarms CR MJ MN for the card and updates them in real time Conditions Displays a list of standing conditions on the card Hist...

Page 337: ...is option is available for all windows Table Contents Prints or exports CTC data in table format without graphical representations of shelves cards or tabs The Table Contents option prints all the data contained in a table with the same column headings For example if you print the History window Table Contents view you print all data included in the table whether or not items appear in the window ...

Page 338: ...hind third party OSI based gateway network elements GNEs For this option CTC Launcher creates a TL1 tunnel to transport the TCP traffic through the OSI based GNE The TL1 tunnel transports the TCP traffic to and from ONS ENEs through the OSI based GNE TL1 tunnels are similar to the existing static IP over CLNS tunnels GRE and Cisco IP that can be created at ONS NEs using CTC Refer to the Cisco ONS ...

Page 339: ... same network using TL1 tunnels Tunnel provisioning occurs at the CTC computer when the tunnel is created with the CTC Launcher No provisioning is needed at ONS NEs GNEs or routers Other vendor GNE 1 Other vendor GNE 2 Central office IP OSI IP over CLNS tunnel IP over CLNS tunnel IP OSI DCC OSI DCC IP DCC IP DCC 140174 IP DCN CTC Tunnel provisioning Tunnel provisioning ONS ENE 1 ONS ENE 2 Tunnel p...

Page 340: ...tunnel IP OSI DCC OSI DCC IP DCC IP DCC Tunnel provisioning 140175 IP DCN CTC ONS ENE 1 ONS ENE 2 TL1 tunnel Table 8 13 TL1 and Static IP Over CLNS Tunnels Comparison Category Static IP Over CLNS TL1 Tunnel Comments Setup Complex Simple Requires provisioning at ONS NE GNE and DCN routers For TL1 tunnels provisioning is needed at CTC computer Performance Best Average to good Static tunnels generall...

Page 341: ...de first by performing a soft reset Note When a CTC reset is performed on an active TCC2 TCC2P card the AIC I cards go through an initialization process and also reset because AIC I cards are controlled by the active TCC2 TCC2P 8 9 TCC2 TCC2P Card Database When dual TCC2 TCC2P cards are installed in the ONS 15454 each TCC2 TCC2P card hosts a separate database therefore the protect card database is...

Page 342: ... TCC2P flash memory If you later need to revert to the original working software load from the protect software load the saved database installs automatically You do not need to restore the database manually or recreate circuits Note The TCC2 TCC2P card does not carry any software earlier than Software R4 0 You will not be able to revert to a software release earlier than Software R4 0 with TCC2 T...

Page 343: ...1 user can be assigned one of the following security levels Retrieve Users can retrieve and view CTC information but cannot set or modify parameters Maintenance Users can access only the ONS 15454 maintenance options Provisioning Users can access provisioning and maintenance options Superuser Users can perform all of the functions of the other security levels as well as set names passwords and sec...

Page 344: ...s Circuits Create Delete 2 X X Edit Filter Search X X X X Rolls Complete Force Valid Signal Finish X X Provisioning General General Edit Partial3 X Multishelf Config Edit Power Monitor Edit X X EtherBridge Spanning trees Edit X X Network General Edit X Static Routing Create Edit Delete X X OSPF Create Edit Delete X X RIP Create Edit Delete X X Proxy Create Edit Delete X Firewall Create Edit Delete...

Page 345: ...ete X X Browse trap destinations X X X X Comm Channels SDCC Create Edit Delete X X LDCC Create Edit Delete X X GCC Create Edit Delete X X OSC OSC Terminations Create Edit Delete X X PPC Create Edit Delete X X LMP General TE Links Data Links X X X X LMP Control Channels X Timing General Edit X X BITS Facilities Edit X X Alarm Profiles Alarm Behavior Edit X X Alarm Profile Editor Store Delete4 X X A...

Page 346: ...ion Refresh X X X X Circuits Refresh X X X X Network Routing Table Retrieve X X X X RIP Routing Table Retrieve X X X X OSI IS IS RIB Refresh X X X X ES IS RIB Refresh X X X X TDC TID to NSAP Flush Dynamic Entries X X X TDC Refresh X X X X BLSR Edit Reset X X X Protection Switch Lock out Lockon Clear Unlock X X X Software Download Cancel X X X Activate Revert X Cross Connect Cards Switch Lock Unloc...

Page 347: ...vilege to perform an action is not available to the user 3 Provisioner user cannot change node name contact location or AIS V insertion on STS 1 signal degrade SD parameters 4 The action buttons in the subtab are active for all users but the actions can be completely performed only by the users with the required security levels Table 9 1 ONS 15454 Security Levels Node View continued CTC Tab Subtab...

Page 348: ...g Security Access tabs For more information about setting up Superuser privileges refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Provisioning Security Users Create Delete X Users Edit Same user Same user Same user All users Active logins Logout Retrieve Last Activity Time X Policy Change X Alarm Profiles Store Delete3 X X New Load Compare Available Usage X X X X BLSR Create Delete Edit Upgrade X X O...

Page 349: ... 0 9 and special characters where at least two characters are nonalphabetic and at least one character is a special character Superusers can specify when users must change and when they can reuse their passwords Locking out and disabling users Superusers can provision the number of invalid logins that are allowed before locking out users and the length of time before inactive users are disabled No...

Page 350: ...user system generated actions Event monitoring is also recorded in the audit log An event is defined as the change in status of an network element External events internal events attribute changes and software upload download activities are recorded in the audit trail To view the audit trail log refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide You can access the audit trail logs from any management in...

Page 351: ...ion authorization and accounting AAA for verifying the identity of granting access to and tracking the actions of remote users 9 4 1 RADIUS Authentication RADIUS is a system of distributed security that secures remote access to networks and network services against unauthorized access RADIUS comprises three components A protocol with a frame format that utilizes User Datagram Protocol UDP IP A ser...

Page 352: ...t Use the same case sensitive shared secret on both RADIUS devices Use a different shared secret for each RADIUS server RADIUS client pair To ensure a random shared secret generate a random sequence at least 22 characters long You can use any standard alphanumeric and special characters You can use a shared secret of up to 128 characters in length To protect your server and your RADIUS clients fro...

Page 353: ...coming from the BITS pins set ONS 15454 timing to external If the timing comes from an OC N card set the timing to line In typical ONS 15454 networks One node is set to external The external node derives its timing from a BITS source wired to the BITS backplane pins The BITS source in turn derives its timing from a primary reference source PRS such as a Stratum 1 clock or global positioning satell...

Page 354: ...sources wired to the BITS input pins on the Node 1 backplane The third reference is set to internal clock The BITS output pins on the backplane of Node 3 are used to provide timing to outside equipment such as a digital access line multiplexer In the example Slots 5 and 6 contain the trunk span cards Timing at Nodes 2 3 and 4 is set to line and the timing references are set to the trunk cards base...

Page 355: ...M is carried over an electrical line For SDH the SSM is transported in the Sa bit of E1 For SONET the SSM is transported in the outband loop code The SSM messages enable SONET and SDH devices to select the highest quality timing reference automatically and to avoid timing loops Node 4 Timing Line Ref 1 Slot 6 Ref 2 Slot 5 Ref 3 Internal ST3 Node 2 Timing Line Ref 1 Slot 5 Ref 2 Slot 6 Ref 3 Intern...

Page 356: ...e Table 10 3 shows the SDH SSM messages Table 10 1 SONET SSM Generation 1 Message Set Message Quality Description PRS 1 Primary reference source Stratum 1 STU 2 Synchronization traceability unknown ST2 3 Stratum 2 ST3 4 Stratum 3 SMC 5 SONET minimum clock ST4 6 Stratum 4 DUS 7 Do not use for timing synchronization RES Reserved quality level set by user Table 10 2 SONET SSM Generation 2 Message Set...

Page 357: ...1 Chapter 10 Timing 10 3 2 SDH SSM Messages G812T 3 Transit node clock traceable G812L 4 Local node clock traceable SETS 5 Synchronous equipment DUS 6 Do not use for timing synchronization Table 10 3 SDH SSM Messages continued Message Quality Description ...

Page 358: ...10 6 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 10 Timing 10 3 2 SDH SSM Messages ...

Page 359: ...hannel DCC and IP encapsulated tunnels To provision circuits and tunnels refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter topics include 11 1 Overview page 11 2 11 2 Circuit Properties page 11 2 11 3 Cross Connect Card Bandwidth page 11 12 11 4 Portless Transmux page 11 15 11 5 DCC Tunnels page 11 16 11 6 SDH Tunneling page 11 18 11 7 Multiple Destinations for Unidirectional Circuits page 11 1...

Page 360: ... following points Before cards are installed The ONS 15454 allows you to provision slots and circuits before installing the traffic cards After you preprovision the Small Form factor Pluggables SFPs also called provisionable port modules PPMs After cards and SFPs are installed and ports are in service Circuits do not actually carry traffic until the cards and SFPs are installed and the ports are I...

Page 361: ...tus The circuit status See the 11 2 2 Circuit Status section on page 11 6 Source The circuit source in the format node slot port port name STS VT The port name appears in quotes Node and slot always appear port port name STS VT might appear depending on the source card circuit type and whether a name is assigned to the port For the OC192 XFP and MRC 12 cards the port appears as port pluggable modu...

Page 362: ...STS Mapping Using CTC Starting STS STS 3c STS 6c STS 9c STS 12c STS 18c STS 24c STS 36c STS 48c STS 192c 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No 7 Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No No 10 Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No 13 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No 16 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No 19 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No 22 Yes No No No Yes Yes No No No 25 Yes Yes Ye...

Page 363: ...No No No No No 85 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No 88 Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No 91 Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No No 94 Yes No No No No No No No No 97 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No 100 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No 103 Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No No 106 Yes No No No Yes Yes Yes No No 109 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No 112 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No 115 Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No N...

Page 364: ... Yes No No No 163 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes No No No 166 Yes No No No Yes Yes No No No 169 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No 172 Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No No 175 Yes Yes No No Yes No No No No 178 Yes No No No No No No No No 181 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No 184 Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No No No 187 Yes Yes No No Yes No No No No 190 Yes No No No Yes No No No No Table 11 1 STS Mapping Using CTC continu...

Page 365: ...rt your CTC session while the failure is active the new CTC session cannot discover the span and its span line does not appear on the network map Subsequently circuits routed on a network span that goes down appear as DISCOVERED during the current CTC session but appear as PARTIAL to users who log in after the span failure DISCOVERED_TL1 A TL1 created circuit or a TL1 like CTC created circuit is c...

Page 366: ...e changing it to the OOS MA DSBLD state For more information about port service state transitions see Appendix B Administrative and Service States Circuits do not use the soak timer but ports do The soak period is the amount of time that the port remains in the OOS AU AINS service state after a signal is continuously received When the cross connects in a circuit are in the OOS AU AINS service stat...

Page 367: ...ected by a two fiber BLSR 4F BLSR The circuit is protected by a four fiber BLSR 2F PCA The circuit is routed on a protection channel access PCA path on a two fiber BLSR PCA circuits are unprotected 4F PCA The circuit is routed on a PCA path on a four fiber BLSR PCA circuits are unprotected BLSR The circuit is protected by a both a two fiber and a four fiber BLSR DRI The circuit is protected by a d...

Page 368: ...abs in HTML comma separated values CSV or tab separated values TSV format The Show Detailed Map checkbox in the Edit Circuit window updates the graphical view of the circuit to show more detailed routing information such as Circuit direction unidirectional bidirectional The nodes STSs and VTs through which a circuit passes including slots and port numbers The circuit source and destination points ...

Page 369: ...witches and loopbacks including F Force switch M Manual switch L Lockout switch Arrow Facility outward or terminal inward loopback Move the mouse cursor over nodes ports and spans to see tooltips with information including the number of alarms on a node organized by severity the port service state and the protection topology Right click a node port or span on the detailed circuit map to initiate c...

Page 370: ...ed at path protection and 1 1 nodes because three STS terminations are required at circuit source and destination nodes and four terminations are required at 1 1 circuit pass through nodes Path protection pass through nodes only require two STS terminations The XCVT and XC10G cards perform VT1 5 multiplexing through 24 logical STS ports on the XCVT or XC10G VT matrix and the XC VXC 10G card perfor...

Page 371: ...ports on the VT matrix is used as shown in Figure 11 4 If you continued to create VT1 5 circuits on different EC 1 STSs and mapped each to an unused outbound STS the VT matrix capacity would be reached after you created 12 VT1 5 circuits in the case of the XCVT or XC10G cards or 48 VT1 5 circuits in the case of the XC VXC 10G card Figure 11 3 One VT1 5 Circuit on One STS STS Matrix XCVT XC10G Matr...

Page 372: ...o VT matrix ports at pass through nodes if VT tunnels and aggregation points are not used If the circuit is routed on a VT tunnel or an aggregation point no VT matrix resources are used Table 11 5 shows basic STS port usage rates for VT 1 5 circuits STS Matrix XCVT XC10G Matrices VT1 5 circuit 1 on STS 1 1 VT1 5 used on STS 1 27 VT1 5s available on STS 1 VT1 5 circuit 2 on STS 2 1 VT1 5 used on ST...

Page 373: ...tions use a full port on the VT matrix even though only 14 VT1 5 circuits can be created Use VT tunnels and VT aggregation points to reduce VT matrix utilization VT tunnels allow VT1 5 circuits to bypass the VT matrix on pass through nodes They are cross connected as STSs and only go through the STS matrix VT aggregation points allow multiple VT1 5 circuits to be aggregated onto a single STS to by...

Page 374: ...three LDCCs is 576 Kbps When multiple DCC channels exist between two neighboring nodes the ONS 15454 balances traffic over the existing DCC channels using a load balancing algorithm This algorithm chooses a DCC for packet transport by considering packet size and DCC utilization You can tunnel third party SONET equipment across ONS 15454 networks using one of two tunneling methods a traditional DCC...

Page 375: ...lot 3 Port 1 Each ONS 15454 node is connected by OC 48 trunk span cards In the example three tunnel connections are created one at Node 1 OC 3 to OC 48 one at Node 2 OC 48 to OC 48 and one at Node 3 OC 48 to OC 3 Figure 11 5 Traditional DCC Tunnel When you create DCC tunnels keep the following guidelines in mind Each ONS 15454 can have up to 84 DCC tunnel connections Each ONS 15454 can have up to ...

Page 376: ...ransport solution with scalable SONET data or DWDM multiservice capabilities The SDH traffic is aggregated and transported across an ONS 15454 network similar to the SONET TDM and data services STM 1 to STM 64 payloads are transported over SONET from any port on a Cisco ONS 15454 OC N card provisioned to support SDH signals For more information on SDH tunneling refer to the SDH Tunneling Over Cisc...

Page 377: ...eated in the direction towards dest odd portless port Even portless port dest Monitored port While creating Monitor circuit using odd portless port as source the circuit will get created in the direction towards src Even portless port odd portless port dest Monitored port Note Monitor circuits cannot be used with Ethernet circuits 11 9 Path ProtectionCircuits Use the Edit Circuits window to change...

Page 378: ... 9 1 Open Ended Path Protection Circuits If ONS 15454s are connected to a third party network you can create an open ended path protection circuit to route a circuit through it To do this you create four circuits One circuit is created on the source ONS 15454 network This circuit has one source and two destinations each destination provisioned to the ONS 15454 interface that is connected to the th...

Page 379: ... extra traffic has lower priority than the traffic on the working channels and has no means for protection During ring or span switches PCA circuits are preempted and squelched For example in a two fiber OC 48 BLSR STSs 25 to 48 can carry extra traffic when no ring switches are active but PCA circuits on these STSs are preempted when a ring switch occurs When the conditions that caused the ring sw...

Page 380: ...ble window displays the following information STS Number Shows the BLSR STS numbers For two fiber BLSRs the number of STSs is half the BLSR OC N for example an OC 48 BLSR squelch table will show 24 STSs For four fiber BLSRs the number of STSs in the table is the same as the BLSR OC N West Source If traffic is received by the node on its west span the BLSR node ID of the source appears To view the ...

Page 381: ...T1 5 circuits are aggregated into a single STS The STS grooming node is not a VT access node The non VT access node performs STS level squelching for each STS timeslot at the switching node in case the VT grooming node fails The node dropping VT traffic performs VT level squelching for each VT timeslot in case the STS grooming end node fails No VT traffic on the VAP is protected during a failure o...

Page 382: ...5454 and Cisco ONS 15454 SDH Ethernet Card Software Feature and Configuration Guide 11 13 Section and Path Trace SONET J0 section and J1 and J2 path trace are repeated fixed length strings composed of 16 or 64 consecutive bytes You can use the strings to monitor interruptions or changes to circuit traffic The OC192 XFP and MRC 12 cards support J0 section trace Table 11 9 shows the ONS 15454 cards ...

Page 383: ...is the C2 byte The SONET standard defines the C2 byte as the path signal label The purpose of this byte is to communicate the payload type being encapsulated by the STS path overhead POH The C2 byte functions similarly to EtherType and Logical Link Control Table 11 9 ONS 15454 Cards Capable of J1 Path Trace J1 Function Cards Transmit and Receive CE Series DS1 141 DS1N 14 DS1 EC1 56 DS3 12E DS3i N ...

Page 384: ...te problems Table 11 11 lists label assignments for signals with payload defects Table 11 10 STS Path Signal Label Assignments for Signals Hex Code Content of the STS Synchronous Payload Envelope SPE 0x00 Unequipped 0x01 Equipped nonspecific payload 0x02 VT structured STS 1 DS 1 0x03 Locked VT mode 0x04 Asynchronous mapping for DS 3 0x12 Asynchronous mapping for DS4NA 0x13 Mapping for Asynchronous...

Page 385: ...re considered shortcuts when CTC calculates a circuit path in path protected mesh networks If you do not choose Fully Path Protected during circuit creation circuits can still contain protected segments Because circuit routing always selects the shortest path one or more links and or segments can have some protection CTC does not look at link protection while computing a path for unprotected circu...

Page 386: ... Network Circuit Automatic Routing Overridable NE default are set to FALSE For a full description of these defaults see Appendix C Network Element Defaults 11 15 1 Bandwidth Allocation and Routing Within a given network CTC routes circuits on the shortest possible path between source and destination based on the circuit attributes such as protection and type CTC considers using a link for the circ...

Page 387: ...t the destination another path protection connection is created to bridge traffic from the ONS 15454 network to the two destinations A similar but opposite path exists for the reverse traffic flowing from the destinations to the sources For unidirectional circuits a path protection drop and continue connection is created at the source node 11 16 Manual Circuit Routing Routing circuits manually all...

Page 388: ... to destination back to source Figure 11 12 Otherwise a route set of links chosen with loops is invalid 55403 BLSR ring 1 1 1 1 1 1 Twoway Twoway Twoway Twoway Node 8 Node 7 Node 5 Node 6 Unidirectional Unidirectional Twoway Twoway Node 4 Node 3 Node 1 Node 2 Twoway Node 12 Node 11 Node 9 Node 10 Source Path Segment 1 Path MESH protected Needs alternate path from N1 to N2 Drop Path Segment 3 BLSR ...

Page 389: ... path protection CTC verifies that the route selection is protected at all segments A route can have multiple protection domains with each domain protected by a different scheme Table 11 12 through Table 11 15 on page 11 32 summarize the available node connections Any other combination is invalid and generates an error 55405 Ethernet source Ethernet destination Node 4 Node 3 Node 1 Node 2 55406 Pa...

Page 390: ...ticard Group Ethernet Shared Packet Ring Circuit Connection Type Number of Inbound Links Number of Outbound Links Number of Sources Number of Destinations At Intermediate Nodes Only Double path protection 2 2 Two way 1 1 At Source or Destination Nodes Only Ethernet 1 1 Table 11 15 Bidirectional VT Tunnels Connection Type Number of Inbound Links Number of Outbound Links Number of Sources Number of ...

Page 391: ...mplete path Link Diversity Only Creates only a link diverse path for each PPMN domain When you choose automatic circuit routing during circuit creation you have the option to require or exclude nodes and links in the calculated route You can use this option to achieve the following results Simplify manual routing especially if the network is large and selecting every span is tedious You can select...

Page 392: ... aggregate of its member circuits You can view whether a VCAT member is In Group or Out of Group in the VCAT State column in the Edit Circuits window If all member circuits are in the IS state the VCAT circuit state is IS If all In Group member circuits are in the OOS state the VCAT circuit state is OOS If no member circuits exist or if all member circuits are Out of Group the VCAT circuit state i...

Page 393: ...re independently routed and protected by the SONET network At the terminating nodes these member circuits are multiplexed into a contiguous stream of data The switch time for split fiber routing depends on the type of circuits traversing the path CCAT circuits carry traffic after the SONET defects are cleared VCAT circuits carry traffic after the SONET defects are cleared and VCAT framers are in f...

Page 394: ...d keep traffic flowing at a reduced bandwidth SW LCAS uses legacy SONET failure indicators like AIS P and remote defect indication path RDI P to detect member failure SW LCAS removes the failed member from the VCAT circuit leaving the remaining members to carry the traffic When the failure clears the member circuit is automatically added back into the VCAT circuit For ML Series cards SW LCAS allow...

Page 395: ... to the circuit is possible but service affecting CE 1000 4 cards You can add or delete SW LCAS VCAT members although it might affect service Before deleting a member Cisco recommends that you put the member in the OOS MA OOG service state If you create non LCAS VCAT circuits adding and deleting members to the circuit is possible but service affecting FC_MR 4 enhanced mode card You can add or dele...

Page 396: ...nctionality are referred to as the VCAT Source and VCAT Destination The termination points of the CTC managed circuit which is the Open Ended VCAT circuit is referred to as simply the Source and Destination Table 11 18 ONS 15454 VCAT Card Capabilities Card Mode Add a Member Delete a Member Support OOS MA OOG CE 100T 8 LCAS Yes1 1 When adding or deleting a member from an LCAS VCAT circuit Cisco rec...

Page 397: ...ample if the circuit is independent fiber routing then multiple OC N ports can be involved Alternatively the source of an open VCAT circuit should always be a card capable of participating in a VCG This allows CTC to determine which routing preferences are permissible Auto ranging of 12 STS1 circuits is supported 11 18 5 1 Open Ended VCAT Protection Table 11 19 summarizes the protection options fo...

Page 398: ... for maintenance functions such as card or facility replacement or for load balancing You can perform a bridge and roll on the following ONS platforms ONS 15454 ONS 15454 SDH ONS 15600 ONS 15327 and ONS 15310 CL 11 19 1 Rolls Window The Rolls window lists information about a rolled circuit before the roll process is complete You can access the Rolls window by clicking the Circuits Rolls tabs in ei...

Page 399: ...cates whether the roll is automatic or manual Note CTC implements a roll mode at the circuit level TL1 implements a roll mode at the cross connect level If a single roll is performed CTC and TL1 behave the same If a dual roll is performed the roll mode specified in CTC might be different than the roll mode retrieved in TL1 For example if you select Automatic CTC coordinates the two rolls to minimi...

Page 400: ... Valid Signal traffic on the circuit that is involved in the roll will be dropped when the roll is completed Finish Completes the circuit processing of both manual and automatic rolls and changes the circuit status from ROLL_PENDING to DISCOVERED After a roll the Finish button also removes any cross connects that are no longer used from the Roll From Circuit field The roll process ends when you fi...

Page 401: ...le STS on Node 1 for a new source Figure 11 18 Single Source Roll In Figure 11 19 you can select any available STS on Node 2 for a new destination TL1_ROLL A TL1 roll was initiated Note If a roll is created using TL1 a CTC user cannot complete or cancel the roll Also if a roll is created using CTC a TL1 user cannot complete or cancel the roll You must use the same interface to complete or change a...

Page 402: ...l from One Circuit to Another Circuit Source Changes Note Create a Roll To Circuit before rolling a circuit with the source on Node 3 and the destination on Node 4 A dual roll involves two cross connects It allows you to reroute intermediate segments of a circuit but keep the original source and destination If the new segments require new cross connects use the Bridge and Roll wizard or create a n...

Page 403: ... circuit has the same name as the original circuit with the suffix _ROLL The circuit source is on Node 3 and the circuit destination is on Node 4 11 19 4 Two Circuit Bridge and Roll When using the bridge and roll feature to reroute traffic using two circuits the following constraints apply DCC must be enabled on the circuits involved in a roll before roll creation A maximum of two rolls can exist ...

Page 404: ...ible You can merge a one way and a two way circuit but not two one way circuits in opposing directions Circuit sizes must be identical VLAN assignments must be identical Circuit end points must send or receive the same framing format The merged circuits must become a DISCOVERED circuit If all connections from the master circuit and all connections from the merged circuits align to form one complet...

Page 405: ...source drop ports of the member circuits or if one or two VCAT terminations are missing Note PARTIAL tunnel and PARTIAL VLAN capable circuits do not split into multiple circuits during reconfiguration 11 22 VLAN Management In Software Release 4 6 and later VLANs are populated within topologies to limit broadcasts to each topology rather than to the entire network Using the Manage VLANs command in ...

Page 406: ...S 1 circuits Similarly a VT1 5 server trail can be used to route VT1 5 circuits and an STS 12c server trail can only be used for STS 12c circuits For example to route a STS 3c 2v circuit over a server trail you must enable split fiber routing and create two STS 3c server trails and route each member manually or automatically over each server trail To route a STS 12c 2v circuit over a server trail ...

Page 407: ...igned to a server trail link using a commonly shared resource such as port fiber or span For example if two server trail links are routed over the same fiber an SRLG attribute can be assigned to these links SRLG is used by Cisco Transport Manager CTM to specify link diversity If you create multiple server trails from one port you can assign the same SRLG value to all the links to indicate that the...

Page 408: ...11 50 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 11 Circuits and Tunnels 11 23 2 VCAT Circuit Routing over Server Trails ...

Page 409: ...r explains Cisco ONS 15454 SONET topologies and upgrades To provision topologies refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Chapter topics include 12 1 SONET Rings and TCC2 TCC2P Cards page 12 1 12 2 Bidirectional Line Switched Rings page 12 3 12 3 Path Protection page 12 14 12 4 Dual Ring Interconnect page 12 19 12 5 Comparison of the Protection Schemes page 12 28 12 6 Subtending Rings page 12 ...

Page 410: ...12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12 1 SONET Rings and TCC2 TCC2P Cards Table 12 1 ONS 15454 Rings with Redundant TCC2 TCC2P Cards Ring Type Maximum Rings per Node BLSRs 5 2 Fiber BLSR 5 4 Fiber BLSR 1 Path protection with SDCC 341 2 Path protection with LDCC 143 4 ...

Page 411: ...t routing routines calculate the shortest path for circuits based on many factors including user requirements traffic patterns and distance For example in Figure 12 1 circuits going from Node 0 to Node 1 typically travel on Fiber 1 unless that fiber is full in which case circuits are routed on Fiber 2 through Node 3 and Node 2 Traffic from Node 0 to Node 2 or Node 1 to Node 3 can be routed on eith...

Page 412: ...e failure conditions and actions taken between nodes in the ring If a break occurs on one fiber working traffic targeted for a node beyond the break switches to the protect bandwidth on the second fiber The traffic travels in a reverse direction on the protect bandwidth until it reaches its destination node At that point traffic is switched back to the working bandwidth Figure 12 2 shows a traffic...

Page 413: ...on Fiber 1 A circuit carried on STS 2 on Fiber 2 is switched to STS 26 on Fiber 1 Fiber 1 carries the circuit to Node 3 the original routing destination Node 3 switches the circuit back to STS 1 on Fiber 2 where it is routed to Node 2 on STS 1 Circuits originating on Node 2 that normally carried traffic to Node 0 on Fiber 1 are switched to the protect bandwidth of Fiber 2 at Node 3 For example a c...

Page 414: ...e bandwidth of two fiber BLSRs Because they allow span switching as well as ring switching four fiber BLSRs increase the reliability and flexibility of traffic protection Two fibers are allocated for working traffic and two fibers for protection as shown in Figure 12 4 To implement a four fiber BLSR you must install four OC 48 OC 48 AS or OC 192 cards at each BLSR node Node 0 Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 ...

Page 415: ...ching Span switching Figure 12 5 on page 12 8 occurs when a working span fails Traffic switches to the protect fibers between the nodes Node 0 and Node 1 in the example in Figure 12 5 and then returns to the working fibers Multiple span switches can occur at the same time Node 0 Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Span 1 Span 2 Span 3 Span 4 Span 8 Span 7 Span 6 Span 5 OC 48 Ring Working fibers Protect fibers 61...

Page 416: ... Ring switching Figure 12 6 occurs when a span switch cannot recover traffic such as when both the working and protect fibers fail on the same span In a ring switch traffic is routed to the protect fibers throughout the full ring Node 0 Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Span 1 Span 2 Span 3 Span 4 Span 8 Span 7 Span 6 Span 5 OC 48 Ring Working fibers Protect fibers 61959 ...

Page 417: ...ble 12 2 shows the bidirectional bandwidth capacities of two fiber BLSRs The capacity is the OC N rate divided by two multiplied by the number of nodes in the ring minus the number of pass through STS 1 circuits Table 12 3 shows the bidirectional bandwidth capacities of four fiber BLSRs Node 0 Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Span 1 Span 2 Span 3 Span 4 Span 8 Span 7 Span 6 Span 5 OC 48 Ring Working fibers Pr...

Page 418: ... hubs Carrier 1 delivers six DS 3s over two OC 3 spans to Node 0 Carrier 2 provides twelve DS 3s directly Node 0 receives the signals and delivers them around the ring to the appropriate node The ring also brings 14 DS 1s back from each remote site to Node 0 Intermediate nodes serve these shorter regional connections Table 12 3 Four Fiber BLSR Capacity OC Rate Working Bandwidth Protection Bandwidt...

Page 419: ...f four OC 3 ports so that two additional OC 3 spans can be added at little cost Figure 12 8 Five Node Two Fiber BLSR Figure 12 9 shows the shelf assembly layout for Node 0 which has one free slot Node 0 56 local DS 1s 4 DS 3s 14 DS 1s 14 DS 1s 14 DS 1s 14 DS 1s 8 DS 3s 4 DS 3s 2 DS 3s Carrier 1 2 OC 3s Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4 Fiber 1 Fiber 2 32138 Carrier 2 12 DS 3s ...

Page 420: ... 3 can be activated An additional four DS 3s can be added at Node 4 and ten DS 3s can be added at Node 2 Each site has free slots for future traffic needs Figure 12 10 Shelf Assembly Layout for Nodes 1 to 4 in Figure 12 8 DS1 14 DS1 14 DS1N 14 DS1 14 DS1 14 OC48 TCC2 TCC2P Cross Connect AIC I Optional Cross Connect TCC2 TCC2P OC48 OC3 OC3 DS3 12 DS3 12 Free Slot 134608 DS1 14 DS1 14 TCC2 TCC2P Cro...

Page 421: ...lug the transmit Tx connector of an OC N card at one node into the receive Rx connector of an OC N card at the adjacent node Cards display an SF LED when Tx and Rx connections are mismatched Figure 12 11 Connecting Fiber to a Four Node Two Fiber BLSR For four fiber BLSRs use the same east west connection pattern for the working and protect fibers Do not mix working and protect card connections The...

Page 422: ...ction circuit requires two DCC provisioned optical spans per node Path protection circuits can be created across these spans until their bandwidth is consumed Note If a path protection circuit is created manually by TL1 data communications channels DCCs are not needed therefore path protection circuits are limited by the cross connection bandwidth or the span bandwidth but not by the number of DCC...

Page 423: ...affic path through Node ID 1 The same signal is also sent on the protect traffic path through Node ID 3 Figure 12 13 Basic Four Node Path Protection If a fiber break occurs Figure 12 14 Node ID 2 switches its active receiver to the protect signal coming through Node ID 3 Because each traffic path is transported around the entire ring path protection configurations are best suited for networks wher...

Page 424: ...provide remote switch connectivity to a host Telcordia TR 303 switch In the example each remote switch requires eight DS 1s to return to the host switch Figure 12 16 on page 12 18 and Figure 12 17 on page 12 18 show the shelf layout for each site Span 1 Span 2 Span 3 Span 4 Span 8 Span 7 Span 6 Span 5 Fiber break Source Destination 32639 ONS 15454 Node ID 0 ONS 15454 Node ID 1 ONS 15454 Node ID 2 ...

Page 425: ...he remote switch You can use the other half of each ONS 15454 shelf assembly to provide support for a second or third ring to other existing or planned remote sites In the OC 3 path protection sample Node ID 0 contains four DS1 14 cards and two OC3 IR 4 1310 cards Six free slots can be provisioned with cards or left empty Figure 12 16 shows the shelf setup for these card 8 DS 1s 8 DS 1s 8 DS 1s TR...

Page 426: ...other cards or left empty Figure 12 17 shows the shelf assembly setup for this configuration example Figure 12 17 Layout of Node IDs 1 to 3 in the OC 3 Path Protection Example in Figure 12 15 DS1 14 DS1 14 TCC2 TCC2P Cross Connect AIC I Optional Cross Connect TCC2 TCC2P Free Slot OC3 IR 4 1310 Free Slot Free Slot OC3 IR 4 1310 Free Slot Free Slot Free Slot DS1 14 DS1 14 134606 DS1 14 DS1 14 TCC2 T...

Page 427: ...iple switches such as Both a service selector and a path selector Both a line switch and a path switch of a service selector For example if a path protection DRI service selector switch does not restore traffic then the path selector switches after the hold off time The path protection DRI hold off timer default is 100 ms You can change this setting in the Path Protection Selectors tab of the Edit...

Page 428: ... Node 8 Ring 2 The primary nodes Nodes 4 and 9 are on the same side and the secondary nodes Nodes 3 and 8 provide an alternative route In Ring 1 traffic at Node 4 is dropped to Node 9 and continued to Node 3 Similarly at Node 9 traffic is dropped to Node 4 and continued to Node 8 Figure 12 18 ONS 15454 Traditional BLSR Dual Ring Interconnect Same Side Routing Service Selector Secondary Path Primar...

Page 429: ...to Node 3 Similarly at Node 8 traffic is dropped to Node 3 and continued to Node 8 Figure 12 19 ONS 15454 Traditional BLSR Dual Ring Interconnect Opposite Side Routing Figure 12 20 shows ONS 15454s in an integrated BLSR DRI topology The same drop and continue traffic routing occurs at two nodes rather than four This is achieved by installing an additional OC N trunk at the two interconnect nodes N...

Page 430: ...re 12 20 ONS 15454 Integrated BLSR Dual Ring Interconnect Figure 12 21 shows an example of an integrated BLSR DRI on the Edit Circuits window Service Selector Secondary Path protection Primary Path working 115236 BLSR 1 Primary Secondary Secondary Primary BLSR 2 Node 8 Node 3 Node 1 Node 2 Node 6 Node 7 Node 5 Node 4 ...

Page 431: ...5454 nodes in a traditional drop and continue path protection DRI topology In Ring 1 Nodes 4 and 5 are the interconnect nodes and in Ring 2 Nodes 6 and 7 are the interconnect nodes Duplicate signals are sent between Node 4 Ring 1 and Node 6 Ring 2 and between Node 5 Ring 1 and Node 7 Ring 2 In Ring 1 traffic at Node 4 is dropped to Node 6 and continued to Node 5 Similarly at Node 5 traffic is drop...

Page 432: ...54 nodes in an integrated DRI topology The same drop and continue traffic routing occurs at two nodes rather than four This is achieved by installing an additional OC N trunk at the two interconnect nodes Path Selector Primary Path Primary Return Path Secondary Return Path Primary Primary Path Secondary UPSR Ring 1 Duplicate Signals Pass through Node UPSR Ring 2 Bridge 85761 Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 N...

Page 433: ...connect Path Selector Primary Path Primary Return Path Secondary Return Path Primary Primary Path Secondary ONS 15454 Path Protection Configuration 1 ONS 15454 Path Protection Configuration 2 DS1 EC1 DS3 GigE Duplicate Signals Pass through Node DS1 EC1 DS3 GigE Bridge 85762 Cross Connect Cross Connect ONS 15454 DRI Node 1 of 2 supporting two rings with integrated STS 1 and VT1 5 grooming ...

Page 434: ...ondary nodes can be the circuit source or destination which is useful when non DCC optical interconnecting links are present Figure 12 24 shows an example of a path protection to BLSR traditional DRI handoff Figure 12 24 ONS 15454 Path Protection to BLSR Traditional DRI Handoff Figure 12 25 shows an example of a path protection to BLSR integrated DRI handoff Path Selector Secondary Path protection...

Page 435: ...on BLSR DRI Handoff Configurations Figure 12 25 ONS 15454 Path Protection to BLSR Integrated DRI Handoff Figure 12 26 shows a path protection to BLSR integrated DRI handoff on the Edit Circuits window Path Selector Bridge 115272 Path Protection Configuration BLSR Node 4 Node 3 Node 1 Node 5 Node 2 Node 8 Node 6 Node 7 ...

Page 436: ...otected Bandwidth Between Any Two Nodes Protection Channel Access Dual Failure Number of Cards Path Protection 48 PT STS 1 48 Not supported Not supported 2 x N Two Fiber BLSR 24 x N1 PT2 STS 1 24 STS 25 48 Not supported 2 x N Four Fiber BLSR 48 x N PT STS 1 48 Fiber 1 STS 1 48 Fiber 2 Supported 4 x N Two Fiber BLSR DRI 24 x N PT STS 1 24 STS 25 48 Supported 2 x N 4 Path Protection DRI 48 PT STS 1 ...

Page 437: ...mber of nodes and cards required and reduce external shelf to shelf cabling Figure 12 27 shows an ONS 15454 with multiple subtending rings Figure 12 27 ONS 15454 with Multiple Subtending Rings Figure 12 28 shows a path protection configuration subtending from a BLSR In this example Node 3 is the only node serving both the BLSR and the path protection configuration OC N cards in Slots 5 and 12 serv...

Page 438: ... 2 runs on Nodes 4 5 6 and 7 Two BLSR rings Ring 1 and Ring 2 are provisioned on Node 4 Ring 1 uses cards in Slots 5 and 12 and Ring 2 uses cards in Slots 6 and 13 Note Nodes in different BLSRs can have the same or different node IDs Figure 12 29 BLSR Subtending from a BLSR Node 3 Node 1 Node 2 BLSR Node 4 55303 Slot 13 Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 12 Slot 13 Slot 6 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 5 Slot 6 55298 Node ...

Page 439: ... can extend ONS 15454 traffic protection by creating path protected mesh networks PPMNs PPMNs include multiple ONS 15454 SONET topologies and extend the protection provided by a single path protection to the meshed architecture of several interconnecting rings In a PPMN circuits travel diverse paths through a network of single or multiple meshed rings When you create circuits you can have CTC auto...

Page 440: ...eeds to be mixed together in virtual rings Figure 12 32 shows Nodes 1 2 3 and 4 in a standard OC 48 ring Nodes 5 6 7 and 8 link to the backbone ring through OC 12 fiber The virtual ring formed by Nodes 5 6 7 and 8 uses both OC 48 and OC 12 cards Primary path Secondary path Working traffic Protect traffic Source Node Destination Node 32136 Node 1 Node 11 Node 2 Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Node 7 Node 8 No...

Page 441: ...ouped in one facility to aggregate more local traffic Figure 12 33 on page 12 34 shows a four shelf node setup Each shelf assembly is recognized as a separate node in the ONS 15454 software interface and traffic is mapped using CTC cross connect options In Figure 12 33 each node uses redundant fiber optic cards Node 1 uses redundant OC N transport and OC N bus connecting cards for a total of four ...

Page 442: ...ircuits amd Route Automatically must be unchecked in the CTC circuit provisioning pane STS around ring circuits created using Transaction Language 1 TL1 are discovered by CTC and the status COMPLETE is displayed STS around the ring supports circuit sizes STS 1 3c 6c 9c 12c 24c 36c 48c and 192cs Both unidirectional and bidirectional circuits are supported and STS around the ring circuits are CCAT o...

Page 443: ...erform in service span upgrades for the following ONS 15454 cards Single port OC 12 to OC 48 Single port OC 12 to OC 192 Single port OC 12 to four port OC 12 Single port OC 12 to MRC 12 Four port OC 12 to MRC 2 5G 4 OC 48 to OC 192 MRC 12 to OC 192 or OC192 XFP MRC 2 5G 4 to OC 192 or OC192 XFP OC 48 to OC192SR1 STM64IO Short Reach or OC192 STM64 Any Reach Note Only Software Release 8 5 3 or highe...

Page 444: ...ed Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Eight port OC 31 1 The eight port OC 3 is not supported in Slots 5 6 12 and 13 Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported One port OC 12 Not supported Not supported Not supported Supported Supported Supported Not supported Four port OC 122 2 The four port OC 12 ...

Page 445: ... in the same maintenance window Until all spans are upgraded mismatched card types or PPM types are present We recommend using the Span Upgrade Wizard to perform span upgrades Although you can also use the manual span upgrade procedures the manual procedures are mainly provided as error recovery for the wizard The Span Upgrade Wizard and the Manual Span Upgrade procedures require at least two tech...

Page 446: ...n be used to perform span upgrades Downgrading can be performed to back out of a span upgrade The procedure for downgrading is the same as upgrading except that you choose a lower rate card type You cannot downgrade if circuits exist on the STSs that will be removed the higher STSs Procedures for manual span upgrades can be found in the Upgrade Cards and Spans chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Proced...

Page 447: ... provides a topology conversion wizard for converting an unprotected point to point or linear ADM topology to path protection This conversion occurs at the circuit level CTC calculates the additional path protection circuit route automatically or you can do it manually When routing the path protection circuit you can provision the USPR as go and return or unidirectional When performing an in servi...

Page 448: ...om an unprotected point to point or linear ADM to a two fiber BLSR use the CTC Convert Unprotected Path Protection to BLSR wizard from the Tools Topology Upgrade menu 12 12 3 Path Protection to Two Fiber BLSR CTC provides a topology conversion wizard to convert a path protection to a two fiber BLSR An upgrade from a path protection to a two fiber BLSR changes path protection to line protection A p...

Page 449: ...to four fiber The fibers that were divided into working and protect bandwidths for the two fiber BLSR are now fully allocated for working BLSR traffic 12 12 5 Add or Remove a Node from a Topology You can add or remove a node from a linear ADM BLSR or path protection configuration Adding or removing nodes from BLSRs is potentially service affecting however adding and removing nodes from an existing...

Page 450: ...12 42 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 12 SONET Topologies and Upgrades 12 12 5 Add or Remove a Node from a Topology ...

Page 451: ...scribes the ONS 15454 OSI implementation and provides scenarios that show how the ONS 15454 can be networked within a mixed IP and OSI environment Note This chapter does not provide a comprehensive explanation of IP networking concepts and procedures nor does it provide IP addressing examples to meet all networked scenarios For ONS 15454 networking setup instructions refer to the Turn Up a Node ch...

Page 452: ...le 13 1 provides a general list of items to check when setting up ONS 15454 nodes in IP networks The TCC2P card secure mode option allows two IP addresses to be provisioned for the node one for the backplane LAN port and one for the TCC2P LAN TCP IP port Secure mode IP addressing examples are provided in the 13 2 9 IP Scenario 9 IP Addressing with Secure Mode Enabled section on page 13 20 IP addre...

Page 453: ...ubnet 192 168 2 0 and attach to LAN B A router connects LAN A to LAN B The IP address of router interface A is set to LAN A 192 168 1 1 and the IP address of router interface B is set to LAN B 192 168 2 1 On the CTC computer the default gateway is set to router interface A If the LAN uses Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP the default gateway and IP address are assigned automatically In the ...

Page 454: ...cted ONS 15454 to respond to the ARP request for ONS 15454s not connected to the LAN ONS 15454 proxy ARP requires no user configuration For this to occur the DCC connected ONS 15454s must reside on the same subnet When a LAN device sends an ARP request to an ONS 15454 that is not connected to the LAN the gateway ONS 15454 returns its MAC address to the LAN device The LAN device then sends the data...

Page 455: ...rts of DCC connected nodes Figure 13 4 The node with an attached host must have a static route to the host Static routes are propagated to all DCC peers using OSPF The existing proxy ARP node is the gateway for additional hosts Each node examines its routing table for routes to hosts that are not connected to the DCC network but are within the subnet The existing proxy server replies to ARP reques...

Page 456: ...e 1 and the CTC computer are on subnet 192 168 1 0 Proxy ARP is not used because the network includes different subnets For the CTC computer to communicate with Nodes 2 and 3 Node 1 is entered as the default gateway on the CTC computer CTC Workstation IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mark at CTC Workstation 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway N A ONS 15454 2 IP Address 192 168 1 20 Subnet Mask 255 255 25...

Page 457: ...rface A The router is not set up with OSPF ONS 15454s residing on different subnets are connected through Node 1 to the router through interface B Because Nodes 2 and 3 are on different subnets proxy ARP does not enable Node 1 as a gateway To connect to the CTC computer on LAN A subnet 192 168 1 0 you must create a static route on Node 1 You must also manually add static routes between the CTC com...

Page 458: ...next hop and the cost number of hops from source to destination is 2 You must manually add static routes between the CTC computers on LAN A B and C and Nodes 2 and 3 because these nodes are on different subnets CTC Workstation IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 Host Routes N A Router IP Address of interface A to LAN A 192 168 1 1 IP Address of interface ...

Page 459: ... Router 192 168 2 1 ONS 15454 3 IP Address 192 168 4 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Static Routes N A LAN B LAN A Int A Int B SONET RING 55251 Static Routes Destination 0 0 0 0 Mask 0 0 0 0 Next Hop 192 168 2 1 Cost 2 LAN C LAN D Router 2 IP Address of the interface connected to LAN A 192 168 1 10 IP Address of the interface connected to LAN C 192 168 5 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0...

Page 460: ...n the ONS 15454s so that the ONS 15454 topology is sent to OSPF routers on a LAN Advertising the ONS 15454 network topology to LAN routers eliminates the need to manually enter static routes for ONS 15454 subnetworks Figure 13 8 shows a network enabled for OSPF Figure 13 9 shows the same network without OSPF Static routes must be manually added to the router for CTC computers on LAN A to communica...

Page 461: ... N A Router IP Address of interface A to LAN A 192 168 1 1 IP Address of interface B to LAN B 192 168 2 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 ONS 15454 2 IP Address 192 168 3 20 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router N A Static Routes N A ONS 15454 1 IP Address 192 168 2 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Router 192 168 2 1 Static Routes N A ONS 15454 3 IP Address 192 168 4 30 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 ...

Page 462: ... the NOC LAN To do this one ONS 15454 is provisioned as a gateway network element GNE and the other ONS 15454s are provisioned as end network elements ENEs The GNE ONS 15454 tunnels connections between CTC computers and ENE ONS 15454s providing management capability while preventing access for non ONS 15454 management purposes CTC Workstation IP Address 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Defa...

Page 463: ...otocol version 1 SNMPv1 traps The GNE ONS 15454 receives SNMPv1 traps from the ENE ONS 15454s and forwards or relays the traps to SNMPv1 trap destinations or ONS 15454 SNMP relay nodes The ONS 15454 SOCKS proxy server is provisioned using the Enable SOCKS proxy server on port check box on the Provisioning Network General tab Figure 13 10 Figure 13 10 SOCKS Proxy Server Gateway Settings If checked ...

Page 464: ...Note If you launch CTC against a node through a Network Address Translation NAT or Port Address Translation PAT router and that node does not have proxy enabled your CTC session starts and initially appears to be fine However CTC never receives alarm updates and disconnects and reconnects every two minutes If the proxy is accidentally disabled it is still possible to enable the proxy during a reco...

Page 465: ...the implementation with ONS 15454 ENEs in multiple rings In each example ONS 15454 GNEs and ENEs are provisioned with the settings shown in Table 13 2 Remote CTC 10 10 20 10 10 10 20 0 24 10 10 10 0 24 Interface 0 0 10 10 20 1 Router A Interface 0 1 10 10 10 1 ONS 15454 GNE 10 10 10 100 24 ONS 15454 ENE 10 10 10 250 24 ONS 15454 ENE 10 10 10 150 24 ONS 15454 ENE 10 10 10 200 24 71673 Local Craft C...

Page 466: ...13 12 IP Scenario 7 ONS 15454 SOCKS Proxy Server with GNE and ENEs on Different Subnets 71674 Remote CTC 10 10 20 10 10 10 20 0 24 10 10 10 0 24 Interface 0 0 10 10 20 1 Router A Interface 0 1 10 10 10 1 ONS 15454 GNE 10 10 10 100 24 ONS 15454 ENE 192 168 10 250 24 ONS 15454 ENE 192 168 10 150 24 ONS 15454 ENE 192 168 10 200 24 Local Craft CTC 192 168 10 20 Ethernet SONET ...

Page 467: ...face 0 0 10 10 20 1 Router A Interface 0 1 10 10 10 1 ONS 15454 GNE 10 10 10 100 24 ONS 15454 ENE 192 168 10 250 24 ONS 15454 ENE 192 168 10 150 24 ONS 15454 ENE 192 168 10 200 24 Ethernet SONET ONS 15454 GNE 10 10 10 200 24 ONS 15454 ENE 192 168 80 250 24 ONS 15454 ENE 192 168 60 150 24 ONS 15454 ENE 192 168 70 200 24 Table 13 3 SOCKS Proxy Server Firewall Filtering Rules Packets Arriving At Are ...

Page 468: ...NEs being advertised over OSPF This feature allows a network to quickly recover from the loss of a GNE even if the GNE is on a different subnet If a GNE fails all connections through that GNE fail CTC disconnects from the failed GNE and from all ENEs for which the GNE was a proxy and then reconnects through the remaining GNEs GNE load balancing reduces the dependency on the launch GNE and DCC band...

Page 469: ...al GNEs on the Same Subnet Figure 13 15 shows a network with dual GNEs on different subnets 115258 Remote CTC 10 10 20 10 10 10 20 0 24 10 10 10 0 24 Interface 0 0 10 10 20 1 Router A Interface 0 1 10 10 10 1 ONS 15454 GNE 10 10 10 100 24 ONS 15454 ENE 10 10 10 250 24 ONS 15454 GNE 10 10 10 150 24 ONS 15454 ENE 10 10 10 200 24 Local Craft CTC 192 168 20 20 Ethernet SONET ...

Page 470: ...the Change Node Settings chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide 13 2 9 1 Secure Mode Behavior Changing a TCC2P node from repeater mode to secure mode allows you to provision two IP addresses for the ONS 15454 and causes the node to assign the ports different MAC addresses In secure mode one IP address is provisioned for the ONS 15454 backplane LAN port and the other IP address is provision...

Page 471: ...S proxy and defaults the node to GNE status However the node can be changed back to an ENE In nonsecure mode an ENE s SOCKS proxy can be disabled effectively isolating the node beyond the LAN firewall but it cannot be disabled in secure mode To change a node s GNE or ENE status and disable the SOCKS proxy refer to the Turn Up a Node chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Caution Enabling s...

Page 472: ...e enabled In each example the node s TCC2P port address node address resides on a different subnet from the node backplane addresses Remote CTC 10 10 20 10 10 10 20 0 24 10 10 10 0 24 Interface 0 0 10 10 20 1 Router A Interface 0 1 10 10 10 1 ONS 15454 GNE Backplane 10 10 10 100 24 TCC2P 176 20 20 40 24 ONS 15454 ENE Backplane 10 10 10 250 24 TCC2P 176 20 20 30 24 ONS 15454 ENE 10 10 10 150 24 Bac...

Page 473: ...mode is written to the new node s chassis and standby TCC2P If you perform a card pull on a secure locked node s active and standby TCC2Ps and insert both of them into a chassis that previously was in unlocked mode the node becomes locked When it is secure and locked a node s configuration Ethernet port status its secure mode and the locked status cannot be changed by any network user including a ...

Page 474: ...is routing table are mapped to the default route entry Mask 0 0 0 0 is always 0 for the default route Gateway 172 20 214 1 is the default gateway address All outbound traffic that cannot be found in this routing table or is not on the node s local subnet is sent to this gateway Interface motfcc0 indicates that the ONS 15454 Ethernet interface is used to reach the gateway Entry 2 shows the followin...

Page 475: ... DCC connected node that is accessible through a node that is not directly connected Destination 172 20 214 94 is the destination host IP address Mask 255 255 255 255 is a 32 bit mask meaning that only the 172 20 214 94 address is a destination Gateway 172 20 214 93 indicates that the destination host is accessed through a node with IP address 172 20 214 93 Interface pdcc0 indicates that a DCC int...

Page 476: ...rk access list 101 permit tcp host 10 10 10 100 host 192 168 10 10 eq 683 access list 101 remark allows alarms etc from the 15454 random port to the CTC workstation port 683 access list 100 remark access list 101 permit tcp host 10 10 10 100 host 192 168 10 10 established access list 101 remark allows ACKs from the 15454 GNE to CTC The following ACL example shows a firewall configuration when the ...

Page 477: ...established only if the far end node identifies itself with that IP address providing an extra level of security By default the SOCKS proxy server only allows connections to discovered ONS peers and the firewall blocks all IP traffic between the DCC network and LAN You can however provision proxy tunnels to allow up to 12 additional destinations for SOCKS version 5 connections to non ONS nodes You...

Page 478: ...l in this example because the GNE would otherwise block IP access between the PC and foreign node This configuration also requires a firewall tunnel on the ENE Remote CTC 10 10 20 10 10 10 20 0 24 10 10 10 0 24 Interface 0 0 10 10 20 1 Router A Interface 0 1 10 10 10 1 ONS 15454 GNE 10 10 10 100 24 ONS 15454 ENE 10 10 10 250 24 Non ONS node Foreign NE 130 94 122 199 28 ONS 15454 ENE 10 10 10 150 2...

Page 479: ... IP and OSI protocols are not directly compatible they do have the same objectives and occupy similar layers of the OSI reference model Table 13 7 shows the protocols and mediation processes that are involved when TCP IP based NEs are networked with OSI based NEs Remote CTC 10 10 20 10 10 10 20 0 24 10 10 10 0 24 Interface 0 0 10 10 20 1 Router A Interface 0 1 10 10 10 1 ONS 15454 GNE 10 10 10 100...

Page 480: ...sioned to support OSI over PPP Table 13 7 TCP IP and OSI Protocols OSI Model IP Protocols OSI Protocols IP OSI Mediation Layer 7 Application TL1 FTP HTTP Telnet IIOP TARP1 1 TARP TID Address Resolution Protocol TL1 over OSI FTAM2 ACSE3 2 FTAM File Transfer and Access Management 3 ACSE association control service element T TD4 FT TD5 4 T TD TL1 Translation Device 5 FT TD File Transfer Translation D...

Page 481: ... timeout period for initiating retries or declaring failures The T203 timer provisions the maximum time between frame exchanges that is the trigger for transmission of the LAP D keep alive Receive Ready RR frames Fixed values are assigned to the following LAP D parameters Terminal Endpoint Identifier TEI A fixed value of 0 is assigned Service Access Point Identifier SAPI A fixed value of 62 is ass...

Page 482: ... field values are in hexadecimal format All NSAPs are editable Shorter NSAPs can be used However NSAPs for all NEs residing within the same OSI network area usually have the same NSAP format Table 13 8 NSAP Fields Field Definition Description IDP AFI Authority and format identifier Specifies the NSAP address format The initial value is 39 for the ISO DCC address format IDI Initial domain identifie...

Page 483: ...S 15454 include 00 Network Entity Title NET Used to exchange PDUs in the ES IS and IS IS routing exchange protocols See the 13 6 4 1 End System to Intermediate System Protocol section on page 13 36 and the 13 6 4 2 Intermediate System to Intermediate System Protocol section on page 13 36 1D Selector for Transport Class 4 and for FTAM and TL1 applications Telcordia GR 253 CORE standard AF Selector ...

Page 484: ...e the ES IS and IS IS protocols ES IS routing establishes connectivity and reach ability among ESs and ISs attached to the same single subnetwork A routing information base RIB see containing this information from which routes between ESs can be computed The RIB consists of a table of entries that identify a destination for example an NSAP the subnetwork over which packets should be forwarded to r...

Page 485: ...tribute the LSPs to all of the other routers When all LSPs are propagated to all routers each router has a complete map of the network topology in the form of LSPs Routers use the LSPs and the SPF algorithm to compute routes to every destination in the network OSI networks are divided into areas and domains An area is a group of contiguous networks and attached hosts that is designated as an area ...

Page 486: ... the intra area routing protocol OSI routing begins when the ESs discover the nearest IS by listening to ISH packets When an ES wants to send a packet to another ES it sends the packet to one of the ISs on its directly attached network The router then looks up the destination address and forwards the packet along the best route If the destination ES is on the same subnetwork the local IS knows thi...

Page 487: ...ol address that the TID must be mapped to The value FE is used to identify the CLNP address type TARP Type Code tar tcd 1 The TARP Type Code identifies the TARP type of PDU Five TARP types shown in Table 13 10 are defined TID Target Length tar tln 1 The number of octets that are in the tar ttg field TID Originator Length tar oln 1 The number of octets that are in the tar tor field Protocol Address...

Page 488: ...PDU is sent to the request originator Type 3 PDUs do not use the TARP propagation procedures 4 Sent as a notification when a change occurs locally for example a TID or NSAP change It might also be sent when an NE initializes A Type 4 PDU is a notification of a TID or Protocol Address change at the NE that originates the notification The PDU is sent to all adjacencies inside and outside the NE s ro...

Page 489: ... in networks where ONS 15454s must communicate across routers or non SONET NEs that lack TARP capability In CTC manual TARP adjacencies are provisioned on the node view Provisioning OSI TARP MAT Manual Area Table subtab The manual adjacency causes a TARP request to hop through the general router or non SONET NE as shown in Figure 13 23 Table 13 12 TARP Processing Flow Process General TARP Flow Fin...

Page 490: ...antaneous replies are involved Static entries allow you to forward TL1 commands to NEs that do not support TARP However static TDC entries are not dynamically updated so outdated entries are not removed after the TID or the NSAP changes on the target node 13 6 6 TCP IP and OSI Mediation Two mediation processes facilitate TL1 networking and file transfers between NEs and ONS client computers runnin...

Page 491: ...OSI stack Figure 13 25 shows the FT TD protocol flow Figure 13 25 FT TD Protocol Flow The ONS 15454 uses FT TD for the following file transfer processes Software downloads Database backups and restores Cisco IOS configuration backups and restores for ML and ML2 Series cards 13 6 7 OSI Virtual Routers The ONS 15454 supports three OSI virtual routers The routers are provisioned on the Provisioning O...

Page 492: ...ust be enabled before Router 2 and Router 3 can be enabled The Router 1 manual area address and System ID create the NSAP address assigned to the node s TID In addition Router 1 supports OSI TARP mediation and tunneling functions that are not supported by Router 2 and Router 3 These include TID to NSAP resolution TARP data cache IP over CLNS tunnels FTAM FT TD T TD LAN subnet OSI virtual router co...

Page 493: ...low incoming traffic intended for an old area address to continue being routed to associated nodes 13 6 8 IP over CLNS Tunnels IP over CLNS tunnels are used to encapsulate IP for transport across OSI NEs The ONS 15454 supports two tunnel types GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation is a tunneling protocol that encapsulates one network layer for transport across another GRE tunnels add both a CLNS heade...

Page 494: ... over CLNS Tunnels tab For procedures refer to the Turn Up a Node chapter in the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide Provisioning IP over CLNS tunnels on Cisco routers requires the following prerequisite tasks as well as other OSI provisioning Required Enable IS IS Optional Enable routing for an area on an interface Optional Assign multiple area addresses Optional Configure IS IS interface parameters ...

Page 495: ...sk 255 255 255 255 for host route CTC 1 only or 255 255 255 0 for subnet route all CTC computers residing on the 10 10 10 0 subnet NSAP 39 840F 80 1111 0000 1111 1111 cccccccccccc 00 other vendor GNE Metric 110 Tunnel Type GRE Other vender GNE IP over CLNS tunnel provisioning information Destination 10 20 30 30 ONS NE 1 Mask 255 255 255 255 for host route ONS NE 1 only or 255 255 255 0 for subnet ...

Page 496: ...router ONS NE 1 IP over CLNS tunnel provisioning Destination 10 10 30 10 Router 1 Interface 0 1 Mask 255 255 255 255 for host route Router 1 only or 255 255 255 0 for subnet route all routers on the same subnet NSAP 39 840F 80 1111 0000 1111 1111 bbbbbbbbbbbb 00 Router 1 Metric 110 Tunnel Type Cisco IP Router 1 CTunnel IP over CLNS provisioning ip routing 134355 CTC 1 10 10 10 100 24 IP DCN IP OSI...

Page 497: ...S node to a router across an OSI DCN The other vendor NE has an OSI connection to an IP DCN to which a CTC computer is attached An OSI only LAP D SDCC is created between the ONS NE 1 and the other vender GNE The OSI over IP tunnel can be either the Cisco IP tunnel or a GRE tunnel depending on the tunnel types supported by the router 134356 CTC 1 10 10 10 100 24 IP DCN OSI Other vendor GNE Other ve...

Page 498: ... 255 255 0 for subnet route all CTC computers on the same subnet NSAP Other vender GNE NSAP address Metric 110 Tunnel Type Cisco IP Router 2 IP over CLNS tunnel provisioning sample Cisco IOS provisioning ip routing clns routing interface ctunnel 102 ip address 10 10 30 30 255 255 255 0 ctunnel destination 39 840F 80 1111 0000 1111 1111 dddddddddddd 00 interface Ethernet0 1 clns router isis router ...

Page 499: ...15454 NEs run TARP which allows them to resolve a TL1 TID to a NSAP address A TID might resolve to both an IP and an NSAP address when the destination TID is an ONS 15454 NE that has both IP and NSAP address DCC links between ONS 15454 NEs and OSI only NEs run the full OSI stack over LAP D which includes IS IS ES IS and TARP DCC links between ONS 15454 NEs run the full OSI stack and IP OSPF over P...

Page 500: ... IP DCC and ONS ENE 13 6 9 2 OSI IP Scenario 2 IP OSS IP DCN ONS GNE OSI DCC and Other Vendor ENE OSI IP Scenario 2 Figure 13 32 shows an ONS 15454 GNE in a multivendor OSI network Both the ONS 15454 GNE and the other vendor NEs are managed by an IP OSS using TL1 and FTP The ONS 15454 is also managed by CTC and Cisco Transport Manager CTM Because the other vendor NE only supports TL1 and FTAM over...

Page 501: ...15454 NEs the TID is resolved to both an IP and an NSAP address The ONS 15454 GNE follows the current TL1 processing model and forwards the request to the destination NE using the TCP IP stack and OSPF routing 1 The IP OSS manages ONS 15454 and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP 2 The ONS 15454 GNE performs mediation for other vendor NEs 3 DCCs between the ONS 15454 GNE and ONS 15454 NEs are provi...

Page 502: ... IS routing TL1 traffic received by an ONS 15454 NE and not addressed to its NSAP address is forwarded by IS IS routing to the correct destination TL1 traffic received by an ONS 15454 NE and addressed to its NSAP is sent up the OSI stack to the mediation function which extracts the TL1 and passes it to the ONS 15454 TL1 processor An OSS initiated software download includes the OSS to destination n...

Page 503: ...454 and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP 2 The other vendor GNE performs mediation for TL1 and FTP so the DCCs to the ONS 15454 and other vendor NEs are OSI only 3 CTC CTM communicates with ONS 15454 NEs over a IP over CLNS tunnel The tunnel is created from the ONS 15454 node to the external router 4 The ONS 15454 NE exchanges TL1 over the full OSI stack using FTAM for file transfer 131933 IP DC...

Page 504: ...CTC CTM to an ONS 15454 NE and then to configure a tunnel from that NE to an NE in each isolated OSPF area This approach requires additional static routes 1 The IP OSS manages ONS and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP 2 The router routes requests to the other vender GNE 3 The other vendor GNE performs mediation for TL1 and FTP so the DCCs to ONS 15454 and other vendor NEs are OSI only 4 CTC CTM c...

Page 505: ...IP connection to the DCN It does not have an OSI DCN connection to carry CTC CTM IP traffic through an IP over OSI tunnel A separate DCN to ONS 15454 NE connection is created to provide CTC CTM access 1 The IP OSS manages ONS 15454 and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP 2 A separate tunnel is created for each isolated ONS 15454 DCC area 131934 IP DCN IP IP IP CTC CTM IP OSS IP ONS NE ONS NE IP and...

Page 506: ...ct on the ONS 15454 because all IP traffic CTC CTM FTP and TL1 is tunneled through the OSI DCN 1 The IP OSS manages ONS 15454 and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP 2 The other vendor GNE performs mediation on TL1 and FTP so DCCs are OSI only 3 CTC CTM communicates with ONS 15454 NEs over a separate IP DCN connection 4 ONS 15454 NE exchanges TL1 over the full OSI stack FTAM is used for file transf...

Page 507: ...SI IP Scenario 7 Figure 13 38 shows an example of a European network 1 The IP OSS manages ONS 15454 and other vendor NEs using TL1 and FTP 2 OSS IP traffic is tunneled through the DCN to the ONS 15454 GNE 3 CTC CTM IP traffic is tunneled through the DCN to the ONS 15454 GNE 4 The GNE performs mediation for other vendor NEs 131936 OSI DCN OSI IP IP IP CTC CTM IP OSS OSI OSI ONS GNE ONS GNE IP and O...

Page 508: ... over CLNS tunnels are widely accepted and deployed 1 ONS 15454 NEs are managed by CTC CTM only TL1 FTP is not used 2 The OSI OSS manages other vendor NEs only 3 CTC CTM communicates with the ONS 15454 over a IP over CLNS tunnel between the ONS 15454 NE and external router 131937 OSI DCN OSI IP CTC CTM IP OSS OSI OSI ONS NE 1 ONS NE 3 ONS NE 2 IP and OSI PPP DCC IP and OSI PPP DCC 2 3 1 OSI LAP D ...

Page 509: ...NS 15454 NEs ONS 15454 NE 2 and 3 know how to reach CTC CTM 13 6 9 8 OSI IP Scenario 8 OSI OSS OSI DCN ONS GNE OSI DCC and Other Vender NEs OSI IP Scenario 8 Figure 13 39 is another example of a European network Similar to OSI IP Scenario 7 the ONS 15454 NEs are solely managed by CTC CTM The CTC CTM IP traffic is carried over a IP over OSI tunnel between an external router and the ONS 15454 GNE Th...

Page 510: ...SS manages other vendor NEs only 3 CTC CTM communicates with the ONS 15454 over an IP over CLNS tunnel between the ONS 15454 NE and the external router A static route is needed on the GNE 4 The ONS 15454 GNE routes OSI traffic to other vendor NEs No IP over CLNS tunnel is needed 131938 OSI DCN OSI IP CTC CTM IP OSS OSI OSI ONS NE 1 Other vendor NE 3 ONS NE 2 IP and OSI PPP DCC OSI PPP DCC 2 3 4 1 ...

Page 511: ... loop detection buffer LAN storm suppression Type 4 PDU on startup TARP timers LDB T1 T2 T3 T4 OSI TARP Static TDC Add and delete static TARP data cache entries OSI TARP MAT Add and delete static manual area table entries OSI Routers Setup Enable and disable routers Add delete and edit manual area addresses OSI Routers Subnets Edit SDCC LDCC and LAN subnets that are provisioned for OSI OSI Tunnels...

Page 512: ...upport for ENE Database Backup The Cisco ONS 15454 provides FTP database backup and restore download to ENEs when proxy firewall is enabled This feature allows you to provision a list of legal FTP hosts in CTC that can be used with TL1 commands to perform database backup restore or software download The FTP hosts can be provisioned to elapse after a specified time interval with the enable FTP rela...

Page 513: ...k level Alarming conforms to Telcordia GR 253 standard Severities conform to Telcordia GR 474 but you can set alarm severities in customized alarm profiles or suppress CTC alarm reporting For a detailed description of the standard Telcordia categories employed by Optical Networking System ONS nodes refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Troubleshooting Guide Note ONS 15454 alarms can also be monitored and m...

Page 514: ...S 4 1 3 by giving the number of STSs contained in the alarmed path For example the Path Width will tell you whether a critical alarm applies to an STS1 or an STS48c The column reports the width as a 1 3 6 12 48 etc as appropriate understood to be STS N Table 14 1 lists the column headings and the information recorded in each column FAN FAIL Slot 8 18 03 04 06 002L 10 24 C 97758 CRIT MAJ MIN Status...

Page 515: ...ncols 32 option Shelf For dense wavelength division multiplexing DWDM configurations the shelf where the alarmed object is located Visible in network view Slot Slot where the alarm occurred appears only in network and node view Port Port where the alarm is raised For STSTerm and VTTerm the port refers to the upstream card it is partnered with Path Width Indicates how many STSs are contained in the...

Page 516: ...CTC keeps the filter active the next time you log in Table 14 3 Alarm Display Button Check Box Tool Action Filter button Allows you to change the display on the Alarms window to show only alarms that meet a certain severity level occur in a specified time frame and or reflect specific conditions For example you can set the filter so that only critical alarms display on the window If you enable the...

Page 517: ...urs and continues for a minimum period CTC raises a condition which is a flag showing that this particular condition currently exists on the ONS 15454 The Conditions window shows all conditions that occur including those that are superseded For instance if a network problem causes two alarms such as LOF and LOS CTC shows both the LOF and LOS conditions in this window even though LOS supersedes LOF...

Page 518: ...s Table 14 5 lists the Conditions window column headings and the information recorded in each column Table 14 4 Conditions Display Button Action Retrieve Retrieves the current set of all existing fault conditions as maintained by the alarm manager from the ONS 15454 Filter Allows you to change the Conditions window display to only show the conditions that meet a certain severity level or occur in ...

Page 519: ... history that directly affects the card Note In the Preference dialog General tab the Maximum History Entries value only applies to the Session window Different views of CTC display different kinds of history The History Session window is shown in network view node view and card view It shows alarms and conditions that occurred during the current user CTC session The History Shelf window is only s...

Page 520: ...sients that have occurred on the node during your login session in the History Session window In the card view history window after you retrieve the card history you can see the history of alarms conditions and transients Table 14 6 History Column Description Column Information Recorded Num An incrementing count of alarm or condition messages The column is hidden by default to view it right click ...

Page 521: ...re reported in the CTC software Alarms Conditions and History windows at all levels network shelf and card ONS equipment provides a standard profile named Default listing all alarms and conditions with severity settings based on Telcordia GR 474 and other standards but users can create their own profiles with different settings for some or all conditions and apply these wherever desired See the 14...

Page 522: ...s you can physically store by deleting and replacing them locally in CTC so that only eight are active at any given time 14 5 1 Creating and Modifying Alarm Profiles Alarm profiles are created in the network view using the Provisioning Alarm Profiles tabs Figure 14 3 shows the default list of alarm severities A default alarm severity following Telcordia GR 253 standards is preprovisioned for every...

Page 523: ... tab But they would still be recorded on the Conditions and History tabs When you modify severities in an alarm profile All Critical CR or Major MJ default or user defined severity settings are demoted to Minor MN in Non Service Affecting NSA situations as defined in Telcordia GR 474 Default severities are used for all alarms and conditions until you create a new profile and apply it The Load and ...

Page 524: ...om of the window Only show service affecting severities If unchecked the editor shows severities in the format sev1 sev2 where sev1 is a service affecting severity and sev2 is not service affecting If checked the editor only shows sev1 alarms Hide reference values Highlights alarms with non default severities by clearing alarm cells with default severities This check box is normally greyed out It ...

Page 525: ... level you can apply profile changes on a card by card basis or set a profile for the entire node At the card level view you can apply profile changes on a port by port basis or set alarm profiles for all ports on that card Figure 14 4 shows the DS1 card alarm profile Figure 14 4 DS1 Card Alarm Profile 14 6 Alarm Suppression The following sections explain alarm suppression features for the ONS 154...

Page 526: ... higher level does not supersede a command applied at a lower level For example applying a node level alarm suppression command makes all raised alarms for the node appear to be cleared but it does not cancel out card level or port level suppression Each of these conditions can exist independently and must be cleared independently Caution Use alarm suppression with caution If multiple CTC or TL1 s...

Page 527: ... define up to 50 alarm types These dynamically added alarm types can be associated or disassociated to any external alarm input and the added alarm type can use the same behavior as hard coded alarm type attributes The following limits and guidelines apply An AIC or AIC I card must be installed Up to 50 Alarm Types can be defined The User Defined name can be up to 20 alphanumeric characters upper ...

Page 528: ...14 16 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 14 Alarm Monitoring and Management 14 7 3 External Controls ...

Page 529: ...Performance Monitoring Parameter Definitions page 15 5 15 5 Performance Monitoring for Electrical Cards page 15 12 15 6 Performance Monitoring for Ethernet Cards page 15 29 15 7 Performance Monitoring for Optical Cards page 15 48 15 8 Performance Monitoring for Optical Multirate Cards page 15 51 15 9 Performance Monitoring for Storage Access Networking Cards page 15 52 Note For transponder TXP and...

Page 530: ...nt the errors during a given accumulation period If zero is entered as the threshold value generation of TCAs is disabled but performance monitoring continues Change the threshold if the default value does not satisfy your error monitoring needs For example customers with a critical DS 1 installed for 911 calls must guarantee the best quality of service on the line therefore they lower all thresho...

Page 531: ...ce monitoring IPPM allows transparent monitoring of a constituent channel of an incoming transmission signal by a node that does not terminate that channel Many large networks only use line terminating equipment LTE not path terminating equipment PTE Table 15 2 shows ONS 15454 cards that are considered LTE Table 15 1 Electrical Cards that Report RX and TX Direction for TCAs Card Line Path Near End...

Page 532: ...igital video transmission has distorted pictures or frozen frames Encryption service loses the encryption key causing data to be transmitted again Pointers provide a way to align the phase variations in STS and VT payloads The STS payload pointer is located in the H1 and H2 bytes of the line overhead Clocking differences are measured by the offset in bytes from the pointer to the first byte of the...

Page 533: ...rors corrected in the DWDM trunk line during the PM time interval CSS Controlled Slip Seconds CSS indicates the count of the seconds when at least one or more controlled slips have occurred CSS P Controlled Slip Seconds Path CSS P indicates the count of the seconds when at least one or more controlled slips have occurred CVCP P Code Violation CP bit Path CVCP P is a count of CP bit parity errors o...

Page 534: ...rity errors one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects ESCP P is defined for the C bit parity application ESCP PFE Far End Errored Seconds CP bit Path ESCP PFE is a count of one second intervals containing one or more M frames with the three FEBE bits not all collectively set to 1 or one or more far end SEF AIS defects ES L Line Errored Seconds ES L is a count of the seconds containing one...

Page 535: ...an AIS P failure an LOP P failure a UNEQ P failure or a Section Trace Identifier Mismatch Path TIM P failure is declared A failure event also begins if the STS PTE that is monitoring the path supports Three Bit Enhanced Remote Failure Indication Path Connectivity ERFI P CONN for that path The failure event ends when these failures are cleared FC PFE Far End STS Path Failure Counts FC PFE is a coun...

Page 536: ...Minimum Receive Optical Power dBm OPT Optical Power Transmitted OPT is the measure of average optical power transmitted as a percentage of the nominal OPT OPT AVG Average Transmit Optical Power dBm OPT MAX Maximum Transmit Optical Power dBm OPT MIN Minimum Transmit Optical Power dBm OPWR AVG Optical Power Average OPWR AVG is the measure of average optical power on the unidirectional port OPWR MAX ...

Page 537: ...switches from a working line to a protection line plus the number of times it switches back to a working line A count is only incremented if ring switching is used PSC S In a four fiber BLSR Protection Switching Count Span PSC S is a count of the number of times service switches from a working line to a protection line plus the number of times it switches back to the working line A count is only i...

Page 538: ...onds containing more than 44 CP bit parity errors one or more SEF defects or one or more AIS defects SESCP PFE Severely Errored Seconds CP bit Path SESCP PFE is a count of one second intervals containing one or more far end SEF AIS defects or one or more 44 M frames with the three FEBE bits not all collectively set to 1 SES L Line Severely Errored Seconds SES L is a count of the seconds containing...

Page 539: ...cur The ten SESCP Ps are included in unavailable time After the DS 3 path becomes unavailable it becomes available again when ten consecutive seconds with no SESCP Ps occur The ten seconds with no SESCP Ps are excluded from unavailable time UASCP PFE Unavailable Seconds CP bit Path UASCP PFE is a count of one second intervals when the DS 3 path becomes unavailable A DS 3 path becomes unavailable w...

Page 540: ...h becomes unavailable it becomes available again when ten consecutive seconds with no SESP Ps occur The ten seconds with no SESP Ps are excluded from unavailable time UAS SM Section Monitoring Unavailable Seconds UAS SM indicates the unavailable seconds recorded in the OTN section during the PM time interval UAS V Unavailable Seconds VT Layer UAS V is a count of the seconds when the VT path was un...

Page 541: ... BTC Tx Rx XC Card s OC N EC1 Side SONET Side STS CV P STS ES P STS FC P STS SES P STS UAS P STS CV PFE STS ES PFE STS FC PFE STS SES PFE STS UAS PFE CV S ES S SES S SEFS S CV L SES L ES L UAS L FC L PPJC Pdet NPJC Pdet PPJC Pgen NPJC Pgen PMs read on Framer PMs read on LIU Table 15 4 EC1 12 Card PMs Section NE Line NE STS Path NE Line FE STS Path FE CV S ES S SES S SEF S CV L ES L SES L UAS L FC ...

Page 542: ... for SES due to system application limitation for the below mentioned ranges as a consequence of which there may not be 10 continuous SES thus UAS will not be observed 15 5 2 DS1 E1 56 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Figure 15 4 shows signal types that support near end and far end PMs Figure 15 4 Monitored Signal Types for the DS1 E1 56 Card Figure 15 5 shows where overhead bytes detected o...

Page 543: ...far end They only exist for ESF framing mode PMs read on Ultramapper ASIC and LIU ES P SAS P UAS P AISS P CSS P CV P SAS P ESA P ESB P FC P FC PFE ES NP ES NPFE SES NP SES NPFE UAS NP UAS NPFE ES PFE SES PFE UAS PFE CSS PFE CV PFE ESA PFE ESB PFE SEFS PFE BFDL ES BFDL UAS BFDL BES BFDL SES BFDL CSS BFDL LOFC AISS P ES P SES P UAS P EB P BBE P ESA P SESR P BBER P ONS 15454 High Density DS 1 E1 Card...

Page 544: ...ers for the DS1 14 and DS1N 14 cards Table 15 5 DS1 E1 56 Card PMs Line NE Line FE Rx Path NE Tx Path NE STS Path NE Rx Path FE STS Path FE Network Path BFDL FE CV L ES L SES L LOSS L CV L ES L SES L LOSS L AISS P CV P ES P SES P SAS P UAS P CSS P ESA P ESB P SEFS P AISS P CV P ES P SES P UAS P BBER P SESR P ESR P CV P ES P SES P UAS P FC P ES PFE ESA PFE ESB PFE CV PFE CSS PFE SEFS PFE SES PFE UA...

Page 545: ...1 Rx SES P DS1 Rx UAS P DS1 Tx AISS P DS1 Tx CV P DS1 Tx ES P DS1 Tx SAS P DS1 Tx SES P DS1 Tx UAS P PMs read on LIU DS1 Side VT Level Path Level SONET Side CV V ES V SES V UAS V STS CV P STS ES P STS FC P STS SES P STS UAS P STS CV PFE STS ES PFE STS FC PFE STS SES PFE STS UAS PFE PMs read on Framer Table 15 6 DS1 14 and DS1N 14 Card PMs Line NE Line FE Rx Path NE Tx Path NE VT Path NE STS Path N...

Page 546: ...F on the DS1N 14 card refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide The monitored DS 1 FDL PM parameters are CV PFE ES PFE ESA PFE ESB PFE SES PFE SEFS PFE CSS PFE UAS PFE FC PFE and ES LFE See Table 15 3 on page 15 5 for detailed information and definitions of specific FDL DS1 PM parameters 15 5 4 DS3 12 and DS3N 12 Card Performance Monitoring Parameters Figure 15 8 shows the signal types that sup...

Page 547: ...onitoring Parameters Figure 15 10 shows the signal types that support near end and far end PMs 78976 ONS 15454 DS3 DS3N Cards LIU Mux Demux ASIC BTC ASIC XC Card s OC N DS3 Side Path Level SONET Side STS CV P STS ES P STS FC P STS SES P STS UAS P STS CV PFE STS ES PFE STS FC PFE STS SES PFE STS UAS PFE DS3 CV L DS3 ES L DS3 SES L DS3 LOSS L PMs read on Mux Demux ASIC PMs read on LIU Table 15 7 DS3...

Page 548: ...5 8 describes the PM parameters for the DS3 12E and DS3N 12E cards 78977 ONS 15454 PTE DS3E OC N Fiber DS3 Signal DS3E Path DS3 XX PMs Near and Far End Supported DS3 Signal ONS 15454 DS3E OC N STS Path STS XX P PMs Near and Far End Supported PTE 78978 ONS 15454 DS3 12E DS3N 12E Cards LIU Mux Demux ASIC BTC ASIC XC Card s OC N DS3 Side Path Level SONET Side STS CV P STS ES P STS FC P STS SES P STS ...

Page 549: ...able 15 8 DS3 12E and DS3N 12E Card PMs Line NE Path NE STS Path NE Path FE 1 1 The C bit PMs PMs that contain the text CP P are applicable only if the line format is C bit STS Path FE CV L ES L SES L LOSS L AISS P CV P ES P SAS P2 SES P UAS P CVCP P ESCP P SASCP P3 SESCP P UASCP P 2 DS3 N 12E cards support SAS P only on the receive Rx path 3 The SASCP parameter is also displayed as undefined for ...

Page 550: ...UASP P DS3 CVCP P DS3 ESCP P DS3 SASCP P DS3 SESCP P DS3 UASCP P DS3 CVCP PFE DS3 ESCP PFE DS3 SASCP PFE DS3 SESCP PFE DS3 UASCP PFE PMs read on LIU PMs read on Mux Demux ASIC Table 15 9 DS3i N 12 Card PMs Line NE Path NE STS Path NE Path FE 1 1 The C Bit PMs PMs that contain the text CP P are applicable only if the line format is C Bit STS Path FE CV L ES L SES L LOSS L AISSP P CVP P ESP P SASP P...

Page 551: ...the DS3XM 6 Card Note The XX in Figure 15 14 represents all PMs listed in Table 15 10 with the given prefix and or suffix Figure 15 15 shows where the overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce PM parameters for the DS3XM 6 card ONS 15454 PTE DS3XM OC N Fiber Muxed DS3 Signal Muxed DS3 Signal DS1 Path DS1 XX PMs Near and Far End Supported ONS 15454 DS3XM OC N VT Path XX V PMs Near and Far End Su...

Page 552: ...P STS ES P STS FC P STS SES P STS UAS P STS CV PFE STS ES PFE STS FC PFE STS SES PFE STS UAS PFE PMs read on Mapper Unit ASIC The DS3 path is terminated on the transmux and regenerated Path Level Table 15 10 DS3XM 6 Card PMs DS3 Line NE DS3 Path NE 1 1 The C Bit PMs PMs that contain the text CP P are applicable only if the line format is C Bit DS1 Path NE VT Path NE STS Path NE DS3 Path FE 1 VT Pa...

Page 553: ...the DS3XM 12 Card Note The XX in Figure 15 16 represents all PMs listed in Table 15 11 with the given prefix and or suffix Figure 15 17 shows where the overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce PM parameters for the DS3XM 12 card ONS 15454 PTE DS3XM OC N Fiber Muxed DS3 Signal Muxed DS3 Signal DS1 Path DS1 XX PMs Near and Far End Supported ONS 15454 DS3XM OC N VT Path XX V PMs Near and Far End ...

Page 554: ...S P STS UAS P STS CV PFE STS ES PFE STS FC PFE STS SES PFE STS UAS PFE PMs read on Mapper Unit ASIC The DS3 path is terminated on the transmux and regenerated Path Level Table 15 11 DS3XM 12 Card PMs DS3 Line NE DS3 Path NE 1 1 The C Bit PMs PMs that contain the text CP P are applicable only if the line format is C Bit DS1 Path NE VT Path NE STS Path NE DS3 Path FE 1 VT Path FE STS Path FE BFDL FE...

Page 555: ...d far end PMs Figure 15 18 Monitored Signal Types for the DS3 EC1 48 Card Note The XX in Figure 15 18 represents all PMs listed in Table 15 12 with the given prefix and or suffix Figure 15 19 shows where the overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce PM parameters for the DS3 EC1 48 card 78975 ONS 15454 PTE DS3 OC N Fiber DS3 Signal DS3 Path DS3 XX PMs Near and Far End Supported DS3 Signal ONS 1...

Page 556: ... on LIU STS CV P STS ES P STS FC P STS SES P STS UAS P STS CV PFE STS ES PFE STS FC PFE STS SES PFE STS UAS PFE PMs read on Mapper Unit ASIC The DS3 path is terminated on the transmux and regenerated Path Level Table 15 12 DS3 EC1 48 Card PMs DS3 EC1 Line NE DS3 Path NE 1 1 The C Bit PMs PMs that contain the text CP P are applicable only if the line format is C Bit STS Path NE DS3 Path FE 1 STS Pa...

Page 557: ...cs window lists Ethernet parameters at the line level The Statistics window provides buttons to change the statistical values shown The Baseline button resets the displayed statistics values to zero The Refresh button manually refreshes statistics Auto Refresh sets a time interval at which automatic refresh occurs Table 15 13 defines the E Series Ethernet card statistics parameters Table 15 13 E S...

Page 558: ...including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets etherStatsPkts512to1023 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets etherStatsPkts1024to1518 Octets The total number of packets includin...

Page 559: ...ts per second in one direction for the Ethernet port that is 1 Gbps The maxBaseRate for E Series Ethernet cards is shown in Table 15 14 Note Line utilization numbers express the average of ingress and egress traffic as a percentage of capacity Note The E Series Ethernet card is a Layer 2 device or switch and supports Trunk Utilization statistics The Trunk Utilization statistics are similar to the ...

Page 560: ...ting the last time statistics were reset Link Status Indicates whether the Ethernet link is receiving a valid Ethernet signal carrier from the attached Ethernet device up means present and down means not present Rx Packets Number of packets received since the last counter reset Rx Bytes Number of bytes received since the last counter reset Tx Packets Number of packets transmitted since the last co...

Page 561: ... the peer Ethernet device attached directly to the G Series port The Utilization window provides an Interval drop down list that enables you to set time intervals of 1 minute 15 minutes 1 hour and 1 day Line utilization is calculated with the following formulas Rx inOctets inPkts 20 8 100 interval maxBaseRate Tx outOctets outPkts 20 8 100 interval maxBaseRate The interval is defined in seconds The...

Page 562: ...ut does not reset the ML Series card During each automatic cycle whether auto refreshed or manually refreshed using the Refresh button statistics are added cumulatively and are not immediately adjusted to equal total received packets until testing ends To see the final PM count totals allow a few moments for the PM window statistics to finish testing and update fully PM counts are also listed in t...

Page 563: ...a nonintegral number of octets Alignment Error Note Note It is entirely normal for etherStatsFragments to increment This is because it counts both runts which are normal occurrences due to collisions and noise hits etherStatsPkts64Octets1 The total number of packets including bad packets received that were 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets etherStatsPkts65to127Oct...

Page 564: ... than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets Alignment Error etherStatsOctets1 The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets etherStatsCollissions Number of transmit pac...

Page 565: ...es POS Ports Parameters for HDLC Mode Parameter Definition ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset rxTotalPkts Number of packets received ifOutOctets Number of bytes transmitted since the last counter reset tx TotalPkts Number of transmitted packets etherStatsDropEvents Number of received frames dropped at the port level rxPktsDropped Internal Congestion Number of received...

Page 566: ...errors In the GFP CORE HDR at the GFP T receiver these are uncorrectable gfpStatsRxTypeInvalid Number of receive packets dropped due to Client Data Frame UPI errors gfpStatsRxCRCErrors Number of packets received with a payload FCS error gfpStatsLFDRaised Count of core HEC CRC multiple bit errors Note This count is only of eHec multiple bit errors when in frame This can be looked at as a count of w...

Page 567: ...d PHY to MAC classB CIR unicast frames rprSpanStatsInUcastClassB CirOctets Number of received PHY to MAC classB CIR unicast octets rprSpanStatsInMcastClassB CirFrames Number of received PHY to MAC classB CIR multicast and broadcast frames rprSpanStatsInMcastClassB CirOctets Number of received PHY to MAC classB CIR multicast and broadcast octets rprSpanStatsInUcastClassA Frames Number of received P...

Page 568: ...anStatsOutUcastClassB EirOctets The number of transmitted MAC to PHY classB EIR unicast octets rprSpanStatsOutMcastClassB EirFrames The number of transmitted MAC to PHY classB EIR multicast and broadcast frames rprSpanStatsOutMcastClassB EirOctets The number of transmitted MAC to PHY classB EIR multicast and broadcast octets rprSpanStatsOutUcastClassB CirFrames The number of transmitted MAC to PHY...

Page 569: ...tsInUcastClassC Frames The number of MAC to client classC unicast frames rprClientStatsInUcastClassC Octets The number of MAC to client classC unicast octets rprClientStatsInMcastClassC Frames The number of MAC to client classC multicast and broadcast frames rprClientStatsInMcastClassC Octets The number of MAC to client classC multicast and broadcast octets rprClientStatsInUcastClassB EirFrames Th...

Page 570: ...rFrames Number of client to MAC classB EIR unicast frames rprClientStatsOutUcastClassB EirOctets Number of client to MAC classB EIR unicast octets rprClientStatsOutMcastClassB EirFrames Number of client to MAC classB EIR multicast and broadcast frames rprClientStatsOutMcastClassB EirOctets Number of client to MAC classB EIR multicast and broadcast octets rprClientStatsOutUcastClassB CirFrames Numb...

Page 571: ...mum permitted frame size rprErrorStatsTooShortFrames The number of received PHY to MAC frames shortest than the minimum permitted frame size rprErrorStatsBadFcsFrames The number of received PHY to MAC data and control frames where the fcs value did not match the expected fcs value rprErrorStatsSelfSrcUcastFram es The number of received PHY to MAC unicast frames that were transmitted by the station...

Page 572: ...nt ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset rxTotalPkts Number of received packets ifInUcastPkts Number of unicast packets received since the last counter reset ifInMulticastPkts Number of multicast packets received since the last counter reset ifInBroadcastPkts Number of broadcast packets received since the last counter reset ifInDiscards The number of inbound packets that...

Page 573: ...ets including bad packets received that were between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets etherStatsPkts256to511 Octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that were between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets etherStatsPkts512to1023 Octets The total number of packets includi...

Page 574: ... number of packets received that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had either a bad FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets Alignment Error etherStatsDropEvents2 Number of received frames dropped at the port level rxPauseFrames1 Number of received pause frames txPauseFram...

Page 575: ...wn means not present ifInOctets Number of bytes received since the last counter reset rxTotalPkts Number of received packets ifInDiscards1 The number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free buffer space ifInErrors1 The n...

Page 576: ...gress traffic as a percentage of capacity 15 6 4 6 CE Series Card POS Ports History Window The Ethernet POS Ports History window lists past Ethernet POS ports statistics for the previous time intervals Depending on the selected time interval the History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown in Table 15 15 on page 15 31 The listed parameters...

Page 577: ...rds Figure 15 21 PM Read Points on the OC 3 Cards Note For PM locations relating to protection switch counts see the Telcordia GR 253 CORE document Table 15 23 and Table 15 24 list the PM parameters for OC 3 cards 78985 ONS 15454 PTE OC 3 OC48 Fiber OC 3 Signal OC 3 Signal ONS 15454 OC 3 OC48 STS Path STS XX P PMs Near and Far End Supported PTE 78986 ONS 15454 OC 3 Card Pointer Processors BTC ASIC...

Page 578: ...meters All other optical cards do not support far end path PM parameters CV S ES S SES S SEF S CV L ES L SES L UAS L FC L PSC 1 1 PSD 1 1 CV P ES P SES P UAS P FC P PPJC PDET NPJC PDET PPJC PGEN NPJC PGEN PPJC PDET P PPJC PGEN P PJC DIFF CV LFE ES LFE SES LFE UAS LFE FC LFE CV PFE ES PFE SES PFE UAS PFE FC PFE Table 15 24 OC3 8 Card PMs Section NE Line NE Physical Layer NE STS Path NE Line FE STS ...

Page 579: ...or the line rates is as shown in Table 15 26 15 8 Performance Monitoring for Optical Multirate Cards This section lists PM parameters for the optical mutirate cards MRC 12 and MRC 2 5G 4 Figure 15 22 shows where overhead bytes detected on the ASICs produce PM parameters for the MRC 12 card and the MRC 2 5G 4 card Table 15 25 OC 12 OC 48 OC 192 OC 192 XFP Card PMs Section NE Line NE STS Path NE Lin...

Page 580: ...ex Section PM SDH Near End MS EB Near End MS ES Near End MS SES Near End MS UAS Near End MS BBE Near End MS FC Far End MS EB Far End MS ES Far End MS SES Far End MS UAS Far End MS BBE Far End MS FC Section PM SONET Near End CV S Near End ES S Near End SEFS S Line PMs SONET Near End CV L Near End ES L Near End SES L Near End UAS L Near End FC L Far End CV LFE Far End ES LFE Far End SES LFE Far End ...

Page 581: ...hed Fibre Channel device up means present and down means not present ifInOctets Number of bytes received without error for the Fibre Channel payload rxTotalPkts Number of Fibre Channel frames received without errors ifInDiscards Number of inbound packets that were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher layer protocol One possib...

Page 582: ... Fibre Channel frames received with frame size 36 bytes mediaIndStatsRxFramesTooLong Number of Fibre Channel frames received with frame size higher than the provisioned maximum frame size mediaIndStatsRxFramesBadCRC Number of Fibre Channel frames received with bad CRC mediaIndStatsTxFramesBadCRC Number of Fibre Channel frames transmitted with bad CRC fcStatsLinkRecoveries Number of link recoveries...

Page 583: ... for the previous time intervals Depending on the selected time interval the History window displays the statistics for each port for the number of previous time intervals as shown in Table 15 30 The listed parameters are defined in Table 15 28 on page 15 53 Table 15 30 FC_MR 4 History Statistics per Time Interval Time Interval Number of Intervals Displayed 1 minute 60 previous time intervals 15 m...

Page 584: ...15 56 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 15 Performance Monitoring 15 9 3 FC_MR 4 History Window ...

Page 585: ... SNMP network administrators can manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan network growth Up to 10 SNMP trap destinations and five concurrent Cisco Transport Controller CTC user sessions are allowed per node The ONS 15454 uses SNMP for asynchronous event notification to a network management system NMS Cisco ONS system SNMP implementation uses standard Internet Engineering...

Page 586: ...in the CiscoV1 directory does not contain 64 bit performance monitoring counters but supports the lower and higher word values of the corresponding 64 bit counter The other MIB files in the CiscoV1 and CiscoV2 directories are identical in content and differ only in format Figure 16 1 illustrates the basic layout idea of an SNMP managed network Figure 16 1 Basic Network Managed by SNMP 16 2 Basic S...

Page 587: ...ering Data from a MIB and Sending Traps to the Manager The SNMP agent captures data from MIBs which are device parameter and network data repositories or from error or change traps A managed element such as a router access server switch bridge hub computer host or network element such as an ONS 15454 is accessed through the SNMP agent Managed devices collect and store management information making...

Page 588: ... MIB mib CERENT FC MIB mib and CERENT GENERIC PM MIB mib The CiscoV1 directory does not contain any 64 bit counters but it does support the lower and higher word values used in 64 bit counters The two directories also have somewhat different formats 16 5 SNMP Message Types The ONS 15454 SNMP agent communicates with an SNMP management application using SNMP messages Table 16 1 describes these messa...

Page 589: ...ity IANA ifType 1213 RFC1213 MIB rfc1213 mib Management Information Base for Network 1907 SNMPV2 MIB rfc1907 mib Management of TCP IP based Internets MIB II Management Information Base for Version 2 of the Simple Network Management Protocol SNMPv2 1253 RFC1253 MIB rfc1253 mib OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base 1493 BRIDGE MIB rfc1493 mib Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges This defi...

Page 590: ... and TXP cards refer to the Cisco ONS 15454 DWDM Reference Manual 2674 P BRIDGE MIB rfc2674 mib Q BRIDGE MIB rfc2674 mib Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic Classes Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions 3273 HC RMON MIB The MIB module for managing remote monitoring device implementations augmenting the original RMON MIB as specified in RFC 2819 and RFC 1513 and RMON 2 ...

Page 591: ...ypes It is indexed based on the following items Interface index cerentGenericPmThresholdIndex Monitor type cerentGenericPmThresholdMonType The syntax of cerentGenericPmThresholdMonType is type cerentMonitorType defined in CERENT TC mib Location cerentGenericPmThresholdLocation The syntax of cerentGenericPmThresholdLocation is type cerentLocation defined in CERENT TC mib Time period cerentGenericPm...

Page 592: ...nericPmStatsIntervalLocation and period cerentGenericPmStatsIntervalPeriod The syntax of cerentGenericPmStatsIntervalIndex is type cerentLocation defined in CERENT TC mib The syntax of cerentGenericPmStatsIntervalMonType is type cerentMonitor defined in CERENT TC mib The syntax of cerentGernicPmStatsIntervalPeriod is type cerentPeriod defined in CERENT TC mib The table provides historic PM values ...

Page 593: ...Root RFC1493 BRIDGE MIB Sending agent is the new root of the spanning tree topologyChange RFC1493 BRIDGE MIB A port in a bridge has changed from Learning to Forwarding or Forwarding to Blocking entConfigChange RFC2737 ENTITY MIB The entLastChangeTime value has changed dsx1LineStatusChange RFC2495 DS1 MIB The value of an instance of dsx1LineStatus has changed The trap can be used by an NMS to trigg...

Page 594: ...value of MIB II s sysUpTime object at the time this DS1 entered its current line status state If the current state was entered prior to the last proxy agent reinitialization the value of this object is zero 3 cerent454NodeTime The time that an event occurred 4 cerent454AlarmState The alarm severity and service affecting status Severities are Minor Major and Critical Service affecting statuses are ...

Page 595: ...ng and Non Service Affecting newRoot from RFC 3 snmpTrapAddress The address of the SNMP trap topologyChange from RFC entConfigChange from RFC 2737 authenticationFailure from RFC 1907 D1 risingAlarm from RFC 2819 1 alarmIndex This variable uniquely identifies each entry in the alarm table When an alarm in the table clears the alarm indexes change for each alarm listed 2 alarmVariable The object ide...

Page 596: ...armIndex This variable uniquely identifies each entry in the alarm table When an alarm in the table clears the alarm indexes change for each alarm listed 2 alarmVariable The object identifier of the variable being sampled 3 alarmSampleType The method of sampling the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds 4 alarmValue The value of the statistic during the ...

Page 597: ...poll for further information about the alarm 4 cerent454AlarmObjectIndex Every alarm is raised by an object entry in a specific table This variable is the index of objects in each table if the alarm is interface related this is the index of the interface in the interface table 5 cerent454AlarmSlotNumber The slot of the object that raised the alarm If a slot is not relevant to the alarm the slot nu...

Page 598: ...r further information about the alarm 4 cerent454AlarmObjectIndex Every alarm is raised by an object entry in a specific table This variable is the index of objects in each table if the alarm is interface related this is the index of the interface in the interface table 5 cerent454AlarmSlotNumber The slot of the object that raised the alarm If a slot is not relevant to the alarm the slot number is...

Page 599: ...cting 3 cerent454AlarmObjectType The entity that raised the alarm The NMS should use this value to decide which table to poll for further information about the alarm 4 cerent454AlarmObjectIndex Every alarm is raised by an object entry in a specific table This variable is the index of objects in each table if the alarm is interface related this is the index of the interface in the interface table 5...

Page 600: ... NE autonomous messages to the NMS The proxy agent requires little provisioning at the NOC and no additional provisioning at the NEs The firewall proxy is intended for use in a gateway network element end network element GNE ENE topology with many NEs through a single NE gateway Up to 64 SNMP requests such as get getnext or getbulk are supported at any time behind single or multiple firewalls The ...

Page 601: ...ietary extension of the HC RMON MIB used for reporting statistics cMediaIndependentHistoryTable proprietary MIB used to support history 16 10 1 1 Row Creation in MediaIndependentTable The SetRequest PDU contains all needed values to activate a row of the mediaIndependentTable in a single operation as well as assign the status variable to createRequest 2 In order to create the row and status the Se...

Page 602: ...pacityTable etherHistoryHighCapacityTable or mediaIndependentTable 16 10 3 Ethernet Statistics RMON Group The Ethernet Statistics group contains the basic statistics monitored for each subnetwork in a single table called the etherStatsTable 16 10 3 1 Row Creation in etherStatsTable The SetRequest PDU for creating a row in this table contains all needed values to activate a table row in a single op...

Page 603: ...y Control RMON Group The History Control group defines sampling functions for one or more monitor interfaces in the historyControlTable The values in this table as specified in RFC 2819 are derived from the historyControlTable and etherHistoryTable 16 10 4 1 History Control Table The RMON is sampled at one of four possible intervals Each interval or period contains specific history values called b...

Page 604: ...trolTable row is created If the row already exists or if the SetRequest PDU values do not make sense or are insufficient the SNMP agent does not create the row and returns an error code 16 10 4 3 Get Requests and GetNext Requests These PDUs are not restricted 16 10 4 4 Row Deletion in historyControl Table To delete a row from the table the SetRequest PDU should contain a historyControlStatus value...

Page 605: ...wing restrictions must be met in the SetRequest PDU The alarmOwner is a string of length 32 characters The alarmRisingEventIndex always takes value 1 The alarmFallingEventIndex always takes value 2 The alarmStatus has only two values supported in SETs createRequest 2 and invalid 4 The AlarmVariable is of the type OID ifIndex where ifIndex gives the interface this alarm is created on and OID is one...

Page 606: ...E100 E1000 21 Dot3StatsSQETestErrors 1 3 6 1 2 1 10 7 2 1 6 Unsupported in E100 E1000 22 etherStatsUndersizePkts 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 9 23 etherStatsFragments 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 11 24 etherStatsPkts64Octets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 14 25 etherStatsPkts65to127Octets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 15 26 etherStatsPkts128to255Octets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 16 27 etherStatsPkts256to511Octets 1 3 6 1 2 1 16 1 1 1 17 ...

Page 607: ...larms and another for falling ones This table has the following restrictions The eventType is always log and trap 4 The eventCommunity value is always a zero length string indicating that this event causes the trap to be despatched to all provisioned destinations The eventOwner column value is always monitor The eventStatus column value is always valid 1 16 10 7 2 Log Table The logTable is impleme...

Page 608: ...16 24 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Chapter 16 SNMP 16 10 7 Event RMON Group ...

Page 609: ... 15454 The following sections are included A 1 Shelf Specifications page A 1 A 2 SFP XFP and GBIC Specifications page A 5 A 3 General Card Specifications page A 7 A 4 Common Control Card Specifications page A 12 A 5 Electrical Card Specifications page A 17 A 6 Optical Card Specifications page A 27 A 7 Ethernet Card Specifications page A 48 A 8 Storage Access Networking Card Specifications page A 5...

Page 610: ... drop multiplexing OADM A 1 3 Cisco Transport Controller CTC the ONS 15454 craft interface software has the following specifications 10BaseT TCC2 TCC2P access RJ 45 connector Backplane access LAN pin field A 1 4 External LAN Interface The ONS 15454 external LAN interface has the following specifications 10BaseT Ethernet Backplane access LAN pin field A 1 5 TL1 Craft Interface The ONS 15454 TL1 cra...

Page 611: ...hm 4 leg connector King and ITT are also compatible AMP Champ AMP 552246 1 with 552562 2 bail locks A 1 9 BITS Interface The ONS 15454 building integrated timing supply BITS interface has the following specifications 2 DS 1 BITS inputs 2 derived DS 1 outputs Backplane access BITS pin field A 1 10 System Timing The ONS 15454 has the following system timing specifications Stratum 3 per Telcordia GR ...

Page 612: ...sing 100 A fuse panel minimum 30 A fuse per shelf A 1 12 Fan Tray Table A 1 lists power requirements for the fan tray assembly A 1 13 System Environmental Specifications The ONS 15454 has the following environmental specifications Operating temperature 0 to 55 degrees Celsius 40 to 65 degrees Celsius with industrial temperature rated cards Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing A 1 14 Di...

Page 613: ... 15454 SFP LC LX 15454E SFP LC LX GE 9 5 to 3 19 to 3 15454 SFP3 1 IR OC 3 15 to 8 23 to 8 15454E SFP L 1 1 STM 1 15 to 8 34 to 10 15454 SFP12 4 IR OC 12 D1 Video 15 to 8 28 to 7 15454E SFP L 4 1 STM 4 D1 Video 15 to 8 28 to 8 15454 SFP OC48 IR OC 48 DV6000 C Cor 5 to 0 18 to 0 ONS SE 2G S1 OC 48 STM 16 10 to 3 18 to 3 15454E SFP L 16 1 STM 16 DV6000 C Cor 5 to 0 18 to 0 15454 SFP 200 15454E SFP 2...

Page 614: ...3 IR1 15 to 8 28 to 8 ONS SI 155 L1 OC 3 LR1 5 to 0 34 to 10 ONS SI 155 L2 OC 3 LR2 5 to 0 34 to 10 ONS_SE 155 1470 through ONS SE 155 1610 OC 3 CWDM 0 to 5 34 to 7 ONS XC 10G S1 OC 192 SR1 6 to 1 11 to 1 ONS XC 10G I2 OC 192 IR2 1 to 2 14 to 2 ONS XC 10G L2 OC 192 LR2 0 to 4 24 to 7 ONS XC 10G 30 3 through ONS XC 10G 61 4 OC 192 STM64 10GE 1 to 3 27 to 7 ONS SE 100 FX FE 20 to 14 30 to 14 ONS SE ...

Page 615: ...GE ONS SI 2G S1 OC 48 STM 16 10 to 3 3 min ONS SE 155 1470 through ONS SE 155 1610 OC 3 STM 1 0 to 5 7 to 0 ONS SI GE SX GE 9 5 to 3 0 to 17 ONS SI GE LX GE 9 5 to 3 3 to 17 ONS SI GE ZX GE 5 to 0 0 to 23 ONS SI 100 FX FE ONS SI 100 LX10 FE ONS SE ZE EL E FE or GE ONS SE 100 BX10U FE 14 to 8 8 to 28 2 ONS SE 100 BX10D FE 14 to 8 8 to 28 2 1 Based on any valid 8B 10B code pattern measured at or ext...

Page 616: ... 68 XC VXC 10G 67 1 4 228 62 AIC I 4 8 0 1 15 3 AEP 3 from 5 VDC from AIC I 10 2 FTA3 Fan Tray 48 VDC 129 60 2 7 442 21 FTA4 Fan Tray 48 VDC 115 2 4 393 Electrical Cards EC1 12 36 60 0 76 124 97 DS1 14 12 60 0 26 43 02 DS1N 14 12 60 0 26 43 02 DS1 E1 56 36 00 0 76 124 97 DS3 12 38 20 0 79 130 43 DS3 EC1 48 30 0 58 95 6 DS3N 12 38 20 0 79 130 43 DS3i N 12 30 0 63 102 4 DS3 12E 26 80 0 56 91 51 DS3N...

Page 617: ...Hz 31 20 0 65 106 53 OC48 ELR 200 GHz 31 20 0 65 106 53 OC192 SR STM64 IO H 1310 41 80 0 90 132 00 OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550 48 00 1 00 163 68 OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 41 80 0 90 132 00 OC192 LR STM64 LH 15xx xx 62 40 1 30 214 00 15454_MRC 12 38 0 79 129 66 MRC 2 5G 4 38 0 79 129 66 OC192SR1 STM64IO Short Reach and OC 192 STM64 Any Reach1 40 0 83 136 49 Ethernet Cards E100T 12 65 1 35 221 93 E100T G 65...

Page 618: ...4 Card Temperature Ranges and Product Names Card Type Card Name C Temp Product Name 32 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 0 to 55 degrees Celsius I Temp Product Name 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 65 degrees Celsius Control Cards TCC2 15454 TCC2 TCC2P 15454 TCC2P XCVT 15454 XC VT 15454 XC VT T XC10G 15454 XC 10G XC VXC 10G 15454 XC VXC 10G T AIC I 15454 AIC I AEP 15454 AEP Electrical EC1 12 15454 EC1 1...

Page 619: ... STM16 LH AS 1550 15454 OC481LR1550A OC48 ELR STM16 EH 100 GHz 15454 OC48E 1 xx xx all wavelengths OC48 ELR STM16 EH 200 GHz 15454 OC48E xx xx all wavelengths OC 192 SR STM64 IO 1310 15454 OC192IO1310 OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550 15454 OC192IR1550 OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 15454 OC192LR1550 OC192 LR STM64 LH ITU 15xx xx 15454 OC192LR15xx 15454_MRC 12 15454 MRC 12 T MRC 2 5G 4 15454 MRC I 4 OC 192 STM 64 SR...

Page 620: ...ugh the backplane Synchronization Stratum 3 per Telcordia GR 253 CORE Free running access Accuracy 4 6 ppm Holdover stability 3 7 10 exp 7 per day including temperature 255 slips in first 24 hours Ethernet E100T 12 15454 E100T E100T G 15454 E100T G E1000 2 15454 E1000 2 E1000 2 G 15454 E1000 2 G G1K 4 15454 G1K 4 ML100T 12 15454 ML100T 12 ML1000 2 15454 ML1000 2 ML100X 8 15454 ML100X 8 ML MR 10 15...

Page 621: ...t including clam shell 1 5 lb 0 7 kg A 4 2 TCC2P Card Specifications The TCC2P card has the following specifications CTC software Interface EIA TIA 232 local craft access on TCC2P faceplate Interface 10BaseT LAN on TCC2P faceplate Interface 10BaseT LAN via backplane Synchronization Stratum 3 per Telcordia GR 253 CORE Free running access Accuracy 4 6 ppm Holdover stability 3 7 10 exp 7 per day incl...

Page 622: ...elsius I Temp 15454 XC VT T 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 65 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 34 40 W 0 72 A 117 46 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Card weight 1 9 lb 0 8 kg A 4 4 XC10G Card Specifications The XC10G card has the following specifications Environmental Operating temperat...

Page 623: ...ts 12 without alarm extension panel AEP 32 with AEP Opto coupler isolated Label is customer provisionable Severity is customer provisionable Common 32 V output for all alarm inputs Each input limited to 2 mA Termination Wire wrap on backplane without AEP on AEP connectors with AEP Alarm outputs Number of outputs 4 user configurable as inputs without AEP 16 with AEP Switched by opto MOS metal oxide...

Page 624: ... to AEP Power monitoring alarming states Power failure 0 to 38 VDC Undervoltage 38 to 40 5 VDC Overvoltage beyond 56 7 VDC Environmental Operating temperature 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 65 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption including AEP if used 8 00 W 0 17 A 27 3 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 ...

Page 625: ...x from 5 VDC from AIC I 10 2 BTU hr max Dimensions of AEP board Height 0 79 in 20 mm Width 13 0 in 330 mm Depth 3 5 in 89 mm Weight 0 4 lb 0 18 kg A 5 Electrical Card Specifications This section provides specifications for the EC1 12 DS1 14 DS1N 14 DS1 E1 56 DS3 EC1 48 DS3 12 DS3N 12 DS3i N 12 DS3 12E DS3N 12E DS3XM 6 DS3XM 12 and filler cards For compliance information refer to the Cisco Optical ...

Page 626: ...rs Operating temperature C Temp 15454 EC1 12 0 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 0 to 55 degrees Celsius I Temp 15454 EC1 12 T 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 65 degrees Celsius Note The I Temp symbol is displayed on the faceplate of an I Temp compliant card A card without this symbol is C Temp compliant Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 36 60 W 0 76 A 124 97 BTU hr Dim...

Page 627: ...089 Operating temperature C Temp 15454 DS1 14 and 15454 DS1N 14 0 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 0 to 55 degrees Celsius I Temp 15454 DS1 14 T and 15454 DS1N 14 T 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 65 degrees Celsius Note The I Temp symbol is displayed on the faceplate of an I Temp compliant card A card without this symbol is C Temp compliant Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consu...

Page 628: ...2 6 to 17 9 dBm centered at 772 KHz Pulse shape Telcordia GR 499 CORE Figure 9 5 DS 1 ITU T G 703 Figure 15 E1 Pulse amplitude 2 4 to 3 6 V peak DS 1 2 7 to 3 3 V peak E1 Loopback modes Terminal and facility Electrical interface SCSI UBIC connectors UBIC H DS 1 and E1 UBIC V DS 1 only Surge protection Telcordia GR 1089 Operating temperature I Temp 15454 DS1E1 56 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to ...

Page 629: ...2 1988 Figure 8 Pulse amplitude 0 36 to 0 85 V peak Loopback modes Terminal and facility Line build out 0 to 225 feet 0 to 68 8 meters 226 to 450 feet 68 9 to 137 2 meters Electrical interface BNC or SMB connectors Surge protection Telcordia GR 1089 Operating temperature I Temp 15454 DS3_EC1 48 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 65 degrees Celsius Note The I Temp symbol is displayed on the facepla...

Page 630: ...1988 Figure 8 Pulse amplitude 0 36 to 0 85 V peak to peak Loopback modes Terminal and facility Line build out 0 to 225 feet 0 to 68 8 meters 226 to 450 feet 68 9 to 137 2 meters Electrical interface BNC or SMB connectors Surge protection Telcordia GR 1089 Operating temperature C Temp 15454 DS3 12 and 15454 DS3N 12 0 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 0 to 55 degrees Celsius I Temp 15454 DS3 12 T and 15454 ...

Page 631: ...alanced coaxial cable Output impedance 75 ohms 5 percent AIS ITU T G 704 compliant Power level 1 8 to 5 7 dBm Note The power level is for a signal of all ones and is measured at a center frequency of 22 368 MHz 3 1 kHz bandwidth Pulse shape ITU T G 703 Figure 14 ANSI T1 102 1988 Figure 8 Pulse amplitude 0 36 to 0 85 V peak to peak Loopback modes Terminal and facility Line build out 0 to 225 feet 0...

Page 632: ...nation Unbalanced coaxial cable Input impedance 75 ohms 5 percent Cable loss Max 450 feet 734A RG 59 728A Max 79 feet RG 179 AIS TR TSY 000191 compliant Power level 1 8 to 5 7 dBm Note The power level is for a signal of all ones and is measured at a center frequency of 22 368 MHz 3 1 kHz bandwidth Pulse shape ANSI T1 102 1988 Figure 8 Pulse amplitude 0 36 to 0 85 V peak to peak Loopback modes Term...

Page 633: ...able Input impedance 75 ohms 5 percent Cable loss Max 450 feet 734A RG 59 728A Max 79 feet RG 179 AIS TR TSY 000191 compliant Output Bit rate 44 736 Mbps 20 ppm Frame format DS 3 ANSI T1 107 1988 Line code B3ZS Termination Unbalanced coaxial cable Input impedance 75 ohms 5 percent Cable loss Max 450 feet 734A RG 59 728A Max 79 feet RG 179 AIS TR TSY 000191 compliant Power level 1 8 to 5 7 dBm Puls...

Page 634: ... ppm Frame format DS 3 ANSI T1 107 1988 Line code B3ZS Termination Unbalanced coaxial cable Input impedance 75 ohms 5 percent Cable loss Max 450 feet 734A RG 59 728A Max 79 feet RG 179 AIS TR TSY 000191 compliant Output Bit rate 44 736 Mbps 20 ppm Frame format DS 3 ANSI T1 107 1988 Line code B3ZS Termination Unbalanced coaxial cable Input impedance 75 ohms 5 percent Cable loss Max 450 feet 734A RG...

Page 635: ...mental Operating temperature C Temp 40 to 149 degree Fahrenheit 40 to 65 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Card weight 0 4 lb 0 19 kg A 6 Optical Card Specifications This section provides specifications for the OC3 IR4 STM1 SH 1310 four port OC3 IR STM1 SH 1310 8 eight port OC12 IR ST...

Page 636: ...er Fabry Perot FP laser Extinction Ratio 8 2 dB Dispersion Ratio 96 ps nm Receiver Maximum receiver level 8 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Minimum receiver level 28 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Receiver InGaAs InP photodetector Link loss budget 13 dB Receiver input wavelength range 1274 to 1356 nm Jitter tolerance Telcordia GR 253 ITU T G 823 compliant Environmental Operating temperature C Temp 15454 OC34IR1310...

Page 637: ...nm Nominal wavelength 1310 nm Transmitter Fabry Perot laser Extinction ratio 8 2 dB Dispersion tolerance 96 ps nm Receiver Maximum receiver level 8 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Minimum receiver level 28 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Receiver InGaAs InP photodetector Link loss budget 13 dB Receiver input wavelength range 1261 to 1360 nm Jitter tolerance Telcordia GR 253 ITU T G 823 compliant Environmental Opera...

Page 638: ...m Transmitter Fabry Perot laser Extinction ratio 8 2 dB Dispersion tolerance 96 ps nm Receiver Maximum receiver level 8 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Minimum receiver level 28 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Receiver InGa As InP photodetector Link loss budget 13 dB Receiver input wavelength range 1274 to 1356 nm Jitter tolerance Telcordia GR 253 ITU T G 823 compliant Environmental Operating temperature C Temp 154...

Page 639: ... 1310 nm Transmitter Distributed feedback DFB laser Extinction ratio 10 dB Dispersion tolerance 190 ps nm Receiver Maximum receiver level 8 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Minimum receiver level 28 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Receiver InGaAs InP photodetector Link loss budget 25 dB Receiver input wavelength range 1280 to 1335 nm Jitter tolerance Telcordia GR 253 ITU T G 823 compliant Environmental Operating tem...

Page 640: ...m Nominal wavelength 1550 nm Transmitter DFB laser Dispersion tolerance 1440 ps nm Receiver Maximum receiver level 8 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Minimum receiver level 28 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Receiver InGaAs InP photodetector Link loss budget 25 dB Receiver input wavelength range 1480 to 1580 nm Jitter tolerance Telcordia GR 253 ITU T G 823 compliant Environmental Operating temperature C Temp 15454 O...

Page 641: ...utput power 15 dBm Center wavelength 1274 to 1356 nm Nominal wavelength 1310 nm Transmitter Fabry Perot laser Extinction ratio 10 dB Dispersion tolerance 190 ps nm Receiver Maximum receiver level 8 dBm Minimum receiver level 30 dBm Receiver InGaAs InP photodetector Link loss budget 15 dB Receiver input wavelength range 1274 to 1356 nm Jitter tolerance Telcordia GR 253 ITU T G 823 compliant Operati...

Page 642: ...ximum transmitter output power 0 dBm Minimum transmitter output power 5 dBm Center wavelength 1280 to 1350 nm Nominal wavelength 1310 nm Transmitter Uncooled direct modulated DFB Receiver Maximum receiver level 0 dBm Minimum receiver level 18 dBm Receiver InGaAs InP photodetector Link loss budget 13 dB minimum Receiver input wavelength range 1280 to 1350 nm Environmental Operating temperature C Te...

Page 643: ...nsmitter DFB laser Receiver Maximum receiver level 8 dBm Minimum receiver level 28 dBm Receiver InGaAs avalanche photo diode APD photodetector Link loss budget 26 dB minimum with 1 dB dispersion penalty Receiver input wavelength range 1520 to 1580 nm Environmental Operating temperature C Temp 15454 OC481LR1550 23 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 5 to 55 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent ...

Page 644: ...ver level 18 dBm Receiver InGaAs InP photodetector Link loss budget 13 dB minimum Receiver input wavelength range 1280 to 1350 nm Jitter tolerance Telcordia GR 253 ITU T G 823 compliant Environmental Operating temperature C Temp 15454 OC481IR1310A 23 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 5 to 55 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 37 20 W 0 77 A 127 01 BTU hr Dim...

Page 645: ... dB dispersion penalty Receiver input wavelength range 1520 to 1580 nm Jitter tolerance Telcordia GR 253 ITU T G 823 compliant Environmental Operating temperature C Temp 15454 OC481LR1550A 23 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 5 to 55 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 37 20 W 0 77 A 127 01 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm De...

Page 646: ...elength range 1520 to 1580 nm Jitter tolerance Telcordia GR 253 ITU T G 823 compliant Environmental Operating temperature C Temp 23 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 5 to 55 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 31 20 W 0 65 A 106 53 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Weight not including clam shell 2 4 lb...

Page 647: ...rating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 31 20 W 0 65 A 106 53 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Weight not including clam shell 2 9 lb 1 3 kg A 6 13 OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 Card Specifications The OC192 SR STM64 IO 1310 card has the following specifications Line Bit rate 9 95328 Gbps Code Scrambled NRZ Fiber 1310 nm si...

Page 648: ... 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Depth with backplane connector 9 250 in 235 mm Weight not including clam shell 3 1 lb 1 3 kg A 6 14 OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550 Card Specifications The OC192 IR STM64 SH 1550 card has the following specifications Line Bit rate 9 95328 Gbps Code Scrambled NRZ Fiber 1550 nm single mode Maximum chromatic dispersion allowance 800 ps nm Loopback modes Terminal and facility Note...

Page 649: ...r consumption 50 00 W 1 04 A at 48 V 170 7 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Depth with backplane connector 9 250 in 235 mm Weight not including clam shell 3 1 lb 1 3 kg A 6 15 OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 Card Specifications The OC192 LR STM64 LH 1550 card has the following specifications Line Bit rate 9 95328 Gbps Code Scrambled NRZ Fiber 1550 n...

Page 650: ...nimum with no dispersion or 22 dB optical path loss at BER 1 exp 12 including dispersion Receiver input wavelength range 1530 to 1565 nm Jitter tolerance Telcordia GR 253 ITU T G 823 compliant Environmental Operating temperature C Temp 15454 OC192LR1550 23 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 5 to 55 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 72 20 W 1 50 A 246 52 BTU ...

Page 651: ...inimum transmitter output power 3 dBm Center wavelength See wavelength plan Center wavelength accuracy 0 040 nm Transmitter LN external modulator transmitter Receiver Maximum receiver level 8 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Minimum receiver level 22 dBm at BER 1 10 exp 12 Receiver APD Link loss budget 25 dB minimum plus 2 dB dispersion penalty at BER 1 10 exp 12 including dispersion Receiver input waveleng...

Page 652: ...5 1556 55 0 040 nm OC192 LR STM64 LH ITU 1556 55 A 6 17 15454_MRC 12 Card Specifications The 15454_MRC 12 card has the following specifications Line Bit rate up to OC 48 2488 320 Mbps depending on SFP Note Each optical interface on the card can be configured as OC 3 OC 12 or OC 48 depending on the available backplane bandwidth and existing provisioned lines In general the card supports all differe...

Page 653: ..._MRC 12 card For ONS SC 2G 28 7 through ONS SC 2G 60 0 SFPs 1527 77 nm to 1560 61 nm 32 distinct wavelengths at 100 GHz spacing Note ONS SC 2G 28 7 ONS SC 2G 33 4 ONS SC 2G 41 3 ONS SC 2G 49 3 and ONS SC 2G 57 3 are supported from Release 8 5 and later For ONS SE 622 1470 through ONS SE 622 1610 SFPs 1470 to 1610 nm eight distinct wavelengths at 2500 GHz spacing For ONS_SE 155 1470 through ONS SE ...

Page 654: ...ds on SFP Environmental Operating temperature 40 to 149 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 65 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 38 00 W 0 79 A at 48 V 129 66 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Depth with backplane connector 9 250 in 235 mm Weight not including clam shell 3 1 lb 1 3 kg Wavelength plan Cur...

Page 655: ...receiver level 1 dBm Minimum receiver level 11 dBm Receiver input wavelength range 1260 to 1565 nm Environmental Operating temperature 32 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 0 to 55 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 40 00 W 0 83 A at 48 V 136 49 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Depth with backplane con...

Page 656: ...55 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 40 00 W 0 83 A at 48 V 136 49 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Depth with backplane connector 9 250 in 235 mm Weight not including clam shell 3 1 lb 1 3 kg A 7 Ethernet Card Specifications This section includes specifications for the E100T 12 E100T G E1000...

Page 657: ... consumption 65 W 1 35 A 221 93 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Card weight 2 3 lb 1 0 kg A 7 3 E1000 2 Card Specifications The E1000 2 card has the following specifications Environmental Operating temperature C Temp 15454 E1000 2 32 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 0 to 55 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power co...

Page 658: ...vironmental Operating temperature 23 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 5 to 55 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 60 W 1 25 A at 48 V 204 8 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 310 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Card weight 2 1 lb 0 9 kg A 7 6 CE 100T 8 Card Specifications The CE 100T 8 card has the following specifications Environmental...

Page 659: ...kg A 7 8 G1K 4 Card Specifications The G1K 4 card has the following specifications Environmental Operating temperature 23 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 5 to 55 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 63 00 W 1 31 A at 48 V 215 1 BTU hr Dimensions Height 12 650 in 321 3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Depth with backplane connector 9 250 in 2...

Page 660: ...3 mm Width 0 716 in 18 2 mm Depth 9 000 in 228 6 mm Depth with backplane connector 9 250 in 235 mm Weight not including clam shell 0 9 kg 2 1 lb A 7 11 ML100X 8 Card Specifications The ML100X 8 card has the following specifications Environmental Operating temperature 23 to 131 degrees Fahrenheit 40 to 65 degrees Celsius Operating humidity 5 to 95 percent noncondensing Power consumption 65 00 W 1 3...

Page 661: ...and FC 1 layers of ANSI X3 230 FC PH GBIC Line Interface Bit Rate 1 0625 Gbit s single rate or 1 0625 2 125 dual rate Gbit s Fibre Channel FC Wavelength Fiber Reach 850 nm multimode fiber 550 m SX 1310 nm single mode fiber 10 km LX 1550 nm single mode fiber 80 km ZX Hot pluggable Auto detection Transmitter Maximum transmitter output power depends on GBIC type see Table A 2 Minimum transmitter outp...

Page 662: ...A 54 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Appendix A Hardware Specifications A 8 Storage Access Networking Card Specifications Card weight 2 59 lb 1 17 kg ...

Page 663: ...vice states include a Primary State PST a Primary State Qualifier PSTQ and one or more Secondary States SST Table B 1 lists the service state PSTs and PSTQs supported by the ONS 15454 Table B 2 defines the SSTs supported by the ONS 15454 Table B 1 ONS 15454 Service State Primary States and Primary State Qualifiers Primary State Primary State Qualifier Definition IS NR In Service and Normal The ent...

Page 664: ...he DSBLD state continue to send an Alarm Indication Signal Line AIS L FLT Fault The entity has a raised alarm or condition LPBK Loopback The entity is in loopback mode MEA Mismatched Equipment An improper card is installed For example an installed card is not compatible with the card preprovisioning or the slot This SST applies only to cards MT Maintenance The entity has been manually removed from...

Page 665: ...service state transitions Table B 3 ONS 15454 Administrative States Administrative State PST SST Definition IS Puts the entity in service IS AINS Puts the entity in automatic in service OOS DSBLD Removes the entity from service and disables it OOS MT Removes the entity from service for maintenance OOS OOG VCAT circuits only Removes a VCAT cross connect cross connect from service and from the group...

Page 666: ...UMA MEA UAS if the card is invalid Change the administrative state to OOS MT OOS AUMA MEA MT OOS AU SWDL Restart completed IS NR Remove the card OOS AU UEQ OOS AU UEQ Insert a valid card OOS AU SWDL Insert an invalid card OOS AU MEA Delete the card OOS AUMA UAS UEQ Change the administrative state to OOS MT OOS AUMA MT UEQ OOS AUMA FLT MT Remove the card OOS AUMA MT UEQ Delete the card OOS AUMA UAS...

Page 667: ... DCC The port supports 1 1 protection or bidirectional line switched rings BLSRs Cross connects are present on the port Overhead connections or overhead terminations are in use such as express orderwire local orderwire or user data channels UDCs OOS AUMA MEA UAS Remove the card OOS AUMA UAS UEQ Provision the card OOS AU MEA OOS AUMA MT SWDL Restart completed OOS MA MT Remove the card OOS AUMA MT U...

Page 668: ...e The DS1 port service state on the DS3XM 12 card is based on the DS3 service state Table B 5 ONS 15454 Port and Cross Connect Service State Transitions Current Service State Action Next Service State IS NR Put the port or cross connect in the OOS MT administrative state OOS MA MT Put the port or cross connect in the IS AINS administrative state OOS AU AINS1 Put the VCAT cross connect in the OOS O...

Page 669: ...ns to OOS AU AINS If an In Group member is OOS MA MT the member transitions to OOS MA MT Put the VCAT cross connect in the IS administrative state OOS AU FLT OOG Put the VCAT cross connect in the OOS DSBLD administrative state OOS MA DSBLD OOG Put the VCAT cross connect in the OOS MT administrative state OOS AUMA FLT MT OOG OOS AU FLT Alarm condition is cleared IS NR Put the port or cross connect ...

Page 670: ... OOS AUMA FLT LPBK MT Release the loopback OOS AUMA FLT MT Alarm condition is cleared OOS MA LPBK MT OOS AUMA FLT LPBK MT OOG Release the loopback OOS AUMA FLT MT OOG Alarm condition is cleared OOS MT MT OOG OOS AUMA FLT MT Alarm condition is cleared OOS MA MT Put the port or cross connect in the IS administrative state OOS AU FLT Put the port or cross connect in the IS AINS administrative state O...

Page 671: ...are in the OOS MA FLT MT service state OOS MA FLT MT Operate a loopback OOS MA FLT LPBK MT OOG OOS MA DSBLD Put the port or cross connect in the IS administrative state IS NR Put the port or cross connect in the IS AINS administrative state OOS AU AINS Put the port or cross connect in the OOS MT administrative state OOS MA MT Put the VCAT cross connect in the OOS OOG administrative state OOS MA MT...

Page 672: ...S NR Put the port or cross connect in the IS AINS administrative state OOS AU AINS Put the port or cross connect in the OOS DSBLD administrative state OOS MA DSBLD OOS MA DSBLD OOG for a VCAT cross connect Put the port or cross connect in a loopback OOS MA LPBK MT Put the VCAT cross connect in the OOS OOG administrative state OOS MA MT OOG Alarm condition is raised OOS AUMA FLT MT OOS AUMA FLT MT ...

Page 673: ...UMA MEA MT Delete unsupported service rate or modify provisioning so that the pluggable equipment is no longer a mismatch OOS MA MT OOS AUMA MT UEQ Insert valid pluggable equipment OOS MA MT OOS AUMA UAS Provision valid pluggable equipment IS NR OOS AUMA UAS UEQ Insert valid pluggable equipment IS NR Insert pluggable equipment with the incorrect rate OOS AU MEA Pluggable equipment does not work wi...

Page 674: ...B 12 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Appendix B Administrative and Service States B 3 3 Pluggable Equipment Service State Transitions ...

Page 675: ...at is without directly changing the NE defaults refer to the Change Card Settings chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide To change node settings refer to the Change Node Settings chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Procedure Guide This appendix includes the following sections C 1 Network Element Defaults Description page C 1 C 2 Card Default Settings page C 2 C 3 Node Default Settings page C 99...

Page 676: ...efault settings for each SONET card Cisco provides several types of user configurable defaults for Cisco ONS 15454 optical electrical storage access networking and Ethernet or data cards Types of card defaults can be broadly grouped by function as outlined in the following subsections For information about individual card settings refer to the Change Card Settings chapter of the Cisco ONS 15454 Pr...

Page 677: ...ration defaults IOS card level IOS tab ML series and RAN SVC cards Console port and RADIUS server access settings Ether Ports CE series cards Line configuration settings including 802 class of service IEEE 802 1p CoS and IP type of service ToS POS Ports CE series cards Line configuration settings Note Line configuration defaults for the CE 100T 8 card apply to both Ethernet port and packet over SO...

Page 678: ... 2 3 Defaults by Card In the tables that follow card defaults are defined by the default name its factory configured value and the domain of allowable values that you can assign to it Note Some default values such as certain thresholds are interdependent Before changing a value review the domain for that default and any other related defaults for potential dependencies C 2 3 1 DS 1 Card Default Se...

Page 679: ...0 DS1 pmthresholds path farend 15min SES 10 seconds 0 900 DS1 pmthresholds path farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS1 pmthresholds path farend 1day CSS 25 seconds 0 86400 DS1 pmthresholds path farend 1day CV 132960 BIP count 0 3715200 DS1 pmthresholds path farend 1day ES 648 seconds 0 86400 DS1 pmthresholds path farend 1day ESA 25 seconds 0 86400 DS1 pmthresholds path farend 1day ESB 25 seconds 0 ...

Page 680: ...000 DS1 pmthresholds sts nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 DS1 pmthresholds sts nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 DS1 pmthresholds sts nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 DS1 pmthresholds sts nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS1 pmthresholds sts nearend 1day CV 125 B3 count 0 207360000 DS1 pmthresholds sts nearend 1day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 DS1 pmthresholds sts nearend 1day FC 10 count 0 6912 DS1 pm...

Page 681: ...DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT config AINSSoakTime 08 00 hours mins 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT config Ds1Mapping Asynchronous Asynchronous when LineType UNFRAMED UNFRAMED Asynchronous Byte Synchronous when LineType ESF D4 E1_MF E1_CRCMF AUTO FRAME J_ESF DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT config FdlMode T1 403 T1 403 when LineType UNFRAMED AUTO FRAME T1 403 BFDL when LineType ESF D4 J_ESF DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT co...

Page 682: ...T pmthresholds line nearend 15min CV 13340 BPV count 0 1388700 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min ES 65 seconds 0 900 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min LO SS 10 seconds 0 900 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min SE S 10 seconds 0 900 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day CV 133400 BPV count 0 133315200 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds line ...

Page 683: ...end 1day ES 648 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1day ESA 25 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1day ESB 25 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1day ESFE 648 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1day ESNE 648 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds path farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 DS1 E1 5...

Page 684: ... DS1 PORT pmthresholds sts farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds sts farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds sts farend 1day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds sts farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds sts farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56 DS1 PORT pmthresholds sts farend 1day UAS 10 seconds...

Page 685: ...0 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT config LineCoding HDB3 HDB3 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT config LineType E1_UNFRAM ED E1_MF E1_CRCMF AUTO FRAME UNFRAMED DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT config RetimingEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT config SaBit SA Bit 4 SA Bit 4 SA Bit 5 SA Bit 6 SA Bit 7 SA Bit 8 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT config SDBER 1 00E 07 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT config SendAISOnFacilit...

Page 686: ...s 0 900 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day AISS 10 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day BBE 90 count 0 27561600 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day EB 90 count 0 43200000 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day ES 648 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT pmthresholds path nearend 1day SES 100 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT pmthreshold...

Page 687: ...mthresholds vt nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT pmthresholds vt nearend 15min SES 10 seconds 0 900 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT pmthresholds vt nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT pmthresholds vt nearend 1day ES 648 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT pmthresholds vt nearend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 DS1 E1 56 E1 PORT pmthresholds vt nearend 1day SES 100 seconds 0 86400 DS1 E1 56...

Page 688: ...ts farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 DS3 pmthresholds sts farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3 pmthresholds sts nearend 15min CV 15 B3 count 0 2160000 DS3 pmthresholds sts nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 DS3 pmthresholds sts nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 DS3 pmthresholds sts nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 DS3 pmthresholds sts nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS3 pmthresholds sts nearend ...

Page 689: ...s 0 86400 DS3 EC1 48 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 DS3 EC1 48 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3 EC1 48 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min CV 382 BIP count 0 38700 DS3 EC1 48 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 DS3 EC1 48 DS3 PORT pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min SAS 2 seconds 0 90...

Page 690: ...3 EC1 48 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day SAS 8 seconds 0 86400 DS3 EC1 48 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 DS3 EC1 48 DS3 PORT pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3 EC1 48 DS3 PORT pmthresholds sts farend 15min CV 15 G1 count 0 2160000 DS3 EC1 48 DS3 PORT pmthresholds sts farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 DS3 EC1 48 DS3 PORT pmth...

Page 691: ...ate IS AINS IS OOS DSBLD OOS MT IS AINS DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT config sts IPPMEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min CV 1312 B2 count 0 137700 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min SES 1 seconds 0 900 DS3 EC1 48 EC...

Page 692: ...ORT pmthresholds section nearend 1day SEFS 5000 seconds 0 86400 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds section nearend 1day SES 5000 seconds 0 86400 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds sts1 farend 15min CV 15 B3 count 0 2160000 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds sts1 farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds sts1 farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds sts1 fare...

Page 693: ... 1day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day FC 10 count 0 6912 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day NPJC PDET 5760 count 0 691200000 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day NPJC PGEN 5760 count 0 691200000 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day PJCDIFF 5760 count 0 1382400000 DS3 EC1 48 EC1 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day...

Page 694: ...end 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 DS3E pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min SAS 2 seconds 0 900 DS3E pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 DS3E pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS3E pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 1day CV 3820 BIP count 0 3715200 DS3E pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 1day ES 250 seconds 0 86400 DS3E pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 1day SAS 8 sec...

Page 695: ...ds sts farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 DS3E pmthresholds sts farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 DS3E pmthresholds sts farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS3E pmthresholds sts farend 1day CV 125 G1 count 0 207360000 DS3E pmthresholds sts farend 1day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 DS3E pmthresholds sts farend 1day FC 10 count 0 6912 DS3E pmthresholds sts farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 DS3E pmthresholds sts fa...

Page 696: ...3820 BIP count 0 3715200 DS3I pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day ESCP 250 seconds 0 86400 DS3I pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day SASCP 8 seconds 0 86400 DS3I pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day SESCP 40 seconds 0 86400 DS3I pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day UASCP 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3I pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min CVCP 382 BIP count 0 38700 DS3I pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min ESCP ...

Page 697: ...10 seconds 0 86400 DS3I pmthresholds sts farend 15min CV 15 G1 count 0 2160000 DS3I pmthresholds sts farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 DS3I pmthresholds sts farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 DS3I pmthresholds sts farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 DS3I pmthresholds sts farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS3I pmthresholds sts farend 1day CV 125 G1 count 0 207360000 DS3I pmthresholds sts farend 1day ES 100 ...

Page 698: ...UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS3XM pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day CV 3820 BIP count 0 3715200 DS3XM pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day ES 250 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day SAS 8 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min CV 382 BIP c...

Page 699: ...700 DS3XM pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 DS3XM pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min SAS 2 seconds 0 900 DS3XM pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 DS3XM pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS3XM pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day AISS 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day CV 3820 BIP count 0 3715200 DS3XM pmthres...

Page 700: ... 0 900 DS3XM pmthresholds vt farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS3XM pmthresholds vt farend 1day CV 125 BIP8 count 0 207360000 DS3XM pmthresholds vt farend 1day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM pmthresholds vt farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM pmthresholds vt farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM pmthresholds vt nearend 15min CV 15 BIP8 count 0 2160000 DS3XM pmthresholds vt nearend 15min ES 1...

Page 701: ... 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds cpbitpath farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min CV 382 BIP count 0 38700 DS3XM12 pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min ES 25 seconds 0 900 DS3XM12 pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min SAS 2 seconds 0 900 DS3XM12 pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min SES 4 seconds 0 900 DS3XM12 pmthresholds cpbitpath nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds ...

Page 702: ...s1path farend 1day SES 100 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds ds1path farend 1day SESFE 100 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds ds1path farend 1day SESNE 100 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds ds1path farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds ds1path farend 1day UASFE 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds ds1path farend 1day UASNE 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds ds1pat...

Page 703: ... count 0 3715200 DS3XM12 pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day ES 250 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day SAS 8 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day SES 40 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds pbitpath nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds sts farend 15min CV 15 B3 count 0 2160000 DS3XM12 pmthresholds sts farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900...

Page 704: ...n CV 15 BIP8 count 0 2160000 DS3XM12 pmthresholds vt nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 DS3XM12 pmthresholds vt nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 DS3XM12 pmthresholds vt nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 DS3XM12 pmthresholds vt nearend 1day CV 125 BIP8 count 0 207360000 DS3XM12 pmthresholds vt nearend 1day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pmthresholds vt nearend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 DS3XM12 pm...

Page 705: ...rend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 EC1 pmthresholds line nearend 1day SES 4 seconds 0 86400 EC1 pmthresholds line nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 EC1 pmthresholds section nearend 15min CV 10000 B1 count 0 138600 EC1 pmthresholds section nearend 15min ES 500 seconds 0 900 EC1 pmthresholds section nearend 15min SEFS 500 seconds 0 900 EC1 pmthresholds section nearend 15min SES 500 seconds 0 900 EC1 pmt...

Page 706: ...mthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 EC1 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 EC1 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 EC1 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day CV 125 B3 count 0 207360000 EC1 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 EC1 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day FC 10 count 0 6912 EC1 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day NPJC PDET 5760 co...

Page 707: ...ension AutoadjustGFPBufferThreshold TRUE TRUE FALSE FC MR config port distanceExtension AutoDetect TRUE TRUE FALSE FC MR config port distanceExtension NumCredits 32 2 256 FC MR config port distanceExtension NumGFPBuffers 16 16 32 48 1200 FC MR config port DistanceExtensionVsLinkRecovery Distance Extension Neither Distance Extension nor Link Recovery Distance Extension LinkRecovery when MediaType U...

Page 708: ...ins 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 CE MR config card Mode MANUAL AUTOMATIC MANUAL CE MR config State OOS DSBLD IS OOS DSBLD OOS MT IS AINS CE MR etherPortConfig 802 1Q VlanCoS 7 count 0 7 CE MR etherPortConfig IP ToS 255 count 0 255 ML1000 config card Mode HDLC HDLC GFP F RPR 802 17 ML1000 config PreServiceAlarmSuppression FALSE TRUE FALSE ML1000 config SoakTime 08 00 hours mins 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 M...

Page 709: ... ST4 DUS RES when NODE timing general SSMMessage Set Generation 2 PRS STU ST2 ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when NODE timing general SSMMessage Set N A OC3 config line sonet Send FF DoNotUse FALSE FALSE when SendDoNotUse TRUE FALSE TRUE when SendDoNotUse FALSE OC3 config line sonet SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE TRUE OC3 config line sonet SyncMsgIn TRUE FALSE TRUE OC3 config line State IS AINS IS OOS DSBLD OOS MT...

Page 710: ...V 100000 B1 count 0 13305600 OC3 pmthresholds section nearend 1day ES 5000 seconds 0 86400 OC3 pmthresholds section nearend 1day SEFS 5000 seconds 0 86400 OC3 pmthresholds section nearend 1day SES 5000 seconds 0 86400 OC3 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min CV 15 B3 count 0 2160000 OC3 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 OC3 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 OC3 pmthresh...

Page 711: ...nearend 15min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 OC3 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 OC3 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 OC3 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 OC3 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 OC3 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 OC3 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min UA...

Page 712: ...e FALSE FALSE TRUE OC3 8 config line sdh SyncMsgIn TRUE FALSE TRUE OC3 8 config line SendAISOnFacilityLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE OC3 8 config line SendAISOnTerminalLoopback FALSE FALSE OC3 8 config line SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 OC3 8 config line sonet AdminSSMIn STU PRS STU ST2 ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when NODE timing general SSMMessage Set Generation 1 PRS STU ST2 TNC ST3E ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when...

Page 713: ...olds warning 1day OPT HIGH 120 OPT LOW OPT LOW 1 OPT LOW 2 255 OC3 8 physicalthresholds warning 1day OPT LOW 80 0 1 2 OPT HIGH OC3 8 pmthresholds line farend 15min CV 1312 B2 count 0 137700 OC3 8 pmthresholds line farend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 OC3 8 pmthresholds line farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 OC3 8 pmthresholds line farend 15min SES 1 seconds 0 900 OC3 8 pmthresholds line farend 15min UAS 3...

Page 714: ... 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min NPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min NPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 ...

Page 715: ...seconds 0 900 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 1day CV 250 B3 count 0 207360000 OC3 8 pmthresholds sts3c nearend 1day ES 200 seconds 0 86400 OC3 ...

Page 716: ... RES when NODE timing general SSMMessag eSet Generation 1 PRS STU ST2 TNC ST3E ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when NODE timing general SSMMessag eSet Generation 2 PRS STU ST2 ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when NODE timing general SSMMessag eSet N A OC12 config line sonet Send FF DoNotUse FALSE FALSE when SendDoNotUse TRUE FALSE TRUE when SendDoNotUse FALSE OC12 config line sonet SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE TRUE OC12 conf...

Page 717: ...line nearend 1day PSD W 600 seconds 0 86400 OC12 pmthresholds line nearend 1day SES 4 seconds 0 86400 OC12 pmthresholds line nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 OC12 pmthresholds section nearend 15min CV 10000 B1 count 0 553500 OC12 pmthresholds section nearend 15min ES 500 seconds 0 900 OC12 pmthresholds section nearend 15min SEFS 500 seconds 0 900 OC12 pmthresholds section nearend 15min SES 500 ...

Page 718: ...nd 15min CV 75 B3 count 0 2160000 OC12 pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min ES 60 seconds 0 900 OC12 pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 OC12 pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min NPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 OC12 pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min NPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 OC12 pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 OC12 pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min PJCS PDET...

Page 719: ...0 OC12 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 OC12 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 OC12 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 OC12 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day CV 250 B3 count 0 207360000 OC12 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day ES 200 seconds 0 86400 OC12 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day FC 10 count 0 6912 OC12 pmthreshol...

Page 720: ... SSMMe ssageSet N A OC12 4 config line sonet Send FF DoNotUse FALSE FALSE when SendDoNotUse TRUE FALSE TRUE when SendDoNotUse FALSE OC12 4 config line sonet SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE TRUE OC12 4 config line sonet SyncMsgIn TRUE FALSE TRUE OC12 4 config line State IS AINS IS OOS DSBLD OOS MT IS AINS OC12 4 config sts IPPMEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE OC12 4 pmthresholds line farend 15min CV 5315 B2 count...

Page 721: ...00 OC12 4 pmthresholds section nearend 15min CV 10000 B1 count 0 553500 OC12 4 pmthresholds section nearend 15min ES 500 seconds 0 900 OC12 4 pmthresholds section nearend 15min SEFS 500 seconds 0 900 OC12 4 pmthresholds section nearend 15min SES 500 seconds 0 900 OC12 4 pmthresholds section nearend 1day CV 100000 B1 count 0 53136000 OC12 4 pmthresholds section nearend 1day ES 5000 seconds 0 86400 ...

Page 722: ...60 count 0 7200000 OC12 4 pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min NPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 OC12 4 pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 OC12 4 pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 OC12 4 pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 OC12 4 pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 OC12 4 pmthresholds sts12c nearend...

Page 723: ...olds sts3c 9c nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 OC12 4 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 OC12 4 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day CV 250 B3 count 0 207360000 OC12 4 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day ES 200 seconds 0 86400 OC12 4 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day FC 10 count 0 6912 OC12 4 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day NPJC PDET 5760 count 0 691200000 OC12 4 pmthreshol...

Page 724: ...4 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 OC48 config line sonet AdminSSMIn STU PRS STU ST2 ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when NODE timing general SSMMe ssageSet Generation 1 PRS STU ST2 TNC ST3E ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when NODE timing general SSMMe ssageSet Generation 2 PRS STU ST2 ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when NODE timing general SSMMe ssageSet N A OC48 config line sonet Send FF DoNotUse FALSE FALSE when SendDoNotUse TRUE FALSE TRUE when...

Page 725: ...5min UAS 3 seconds 0 900 OC48 pmthresholds line nearend 1day CV 212600 B2 count 0 212371200 OC48 pmthresholds line nearend 1day ES 864 seconds 0 86400 OC48 pmthresholds line nearend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 OC48 pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSC 5 count 0 57600 OC48 pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSC R 5 count 0 57600 OC48 pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSC S 5 count 0 57600 OC48 pmthresholds line...

Page 726: ... pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day NPJC PDET 5760 count 0 691200000 OC48 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day NPJC PGEN 5760 count 0 691200000 OC48 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day PJCDIFF 5760 count 0 1382400000 OC48 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day PJCS PDET 9600 seconds 0 86400 OC48 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day PJCS PGEN 9600 seconds 0 86400 OC48 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day PPJC PDET 5760 count 0 69120...

Page 727: ...s3c 9c nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 OC48 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min NPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 OC48 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min NPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 OC48 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 OC48 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 OC48 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 OC48 pmthreshol...

Page 728: ... OC192 config line AlsMode Disabled Disabled Auto Restart Manual Restart Manual Restart for Test OC192 config line AlsRecoveryPulseDuration 2 0 seconds 2 0 2 1 2 2 100 0 when AlsMode Disabled Auto Restart Manual Restart 80 0 80 1 80 2 100 0 when AlsMode Manual Restart for Test OC192 config line AlsRecoveryPulseInterval 100 seconds 60 300 OC192 config line PJStsMon 0 STS 0 192 OC192 config line SDB...

Page 729: ...0 1 2 LBC HIGH OC192 physicalthresholds alarm OPR HIGH 200 OPR LOW OPR LOW 1 OPR LOW 2 255 OC192 physicalthresholds alarm OPR LOW 50 1 0 1 OPR HIGH OC192 physicalthresholds alarm OPT HIGH 120 OPT LOW OPT LOW 1 OPT LOW 2 255 OC192 physicalthresholds alarm OPT LOW 80 0 1 2 OPT HIGH OC192 physicalthresholds warning 15min LBC HIGH 200 LBC LOW LBC LOW 1 LBC LOW 2 255 OC192 physicalthresholds warning 15...

Page 730: ...onds 0 900 OC192 pmthresholds line nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 OC192 pmthresholds line nearend 15min PSC 1 count 0 600 OC192 pmthresholds line nearend 15min PSC R 1 count 0 600 OC192 pmthresholds line nearend 15min PSC S 1 count 0 600 OC192 pmthresholds line nearend 15min PSC W 1 count 0 600 OC192 pmthresholds line nearend 15min PSD 300 seconds 0 900 OC192 pmthresholds line nearend 15min PSD R ...

Page 731: ...thresholds sts1 nearend 15min NPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 OC192 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min NPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 OC192 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 OC192 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 OC192 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 OC192 pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 OC192 pmt...

Page 732: ...C 10 count 0 6912 OC192 pmthresholds sts12c 192c nearend 1day NPJC PDET 5760 count 0 691200000 OC192 pmthresholds sts12c 192c nearend 1day NPJC PGEN 5760 count 0 691200000 OC192 pmthresholds sts12c 192c nearend 1day PJCDIFF 5760 count 0 1382400000 OC192 pmthresholds sts12c 192c nearend 1day PJCS PDET 9600 seconds 0 691200000 OC192 pmthresholds sts12c 192c nearend 1day PJCS PGEN 9600 seconds 0 8640...

Page 733: ...00000 OC192 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day PPJC PGEN 5760 count 0 691200000 OC192 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 OC192 pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 Table C 17 OC 192 Card Default Settings continued Default Name Default Value Default Domain Table C 18 OC192 XFP Default Settings Default Name Default Value Default Domain OC192 XFP config line...

Page 734: ...nfig line State IS AINS IS OOS DSBLD OOS MT IS AINS OC192 XFP config sts IPPMEnabled FALSE TRUE FALSE OC192 XFP physicalthresholds alarm LBC HIGH 200 LBC LOW LBC LOW 1 LBC LOW 2 255 OC192 XFP physicalthresholds alarm LBC LOW 20 0 1 2 LBC HIGH OC192 XFP physicalthresholds alarm OPR HIGH 200 OPR LOW OPR LOW 1 OPR LOW 2 255 OC192 XFP physicalthresholds alarm OPR LOW 50 1 0 1 OPR HIGH OC192 XFP physic...

Page 735: ...2 XFP pmthresholds line farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 OC192 XFP pmthresholds line farend 1day SES 4 seconds 0 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds line farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds line nearend 15min CV 85040 B2 count 0 8850600 OC192 XFP pmthresholds line nearend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 OC192 XFP pmthresholds line nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 OC192 XFP pmthresholds line n...

Page 736: ...00 B1 count 0 764899200 OC192 XFP pmthresholds section nearend 1day ES 5000 seconds 0 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds section nearend 1day SEFS 5000 seconds 0 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds section nearend 1day SES 5000 seconds 0 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts1 farend 15min CV 15 B3 count 0 2160000 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts1 farend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts1 farend 15min F...

Page 737: ...OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts12c 192c farend 15min CV 75 B3 count 0 2160000 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts12c 192c farend 15min ES 60 seconds 0 900 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts12c 192c farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts12c 192c farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900...

Page 738: ...earend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts12c 192c nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 15min CV 25 B3 count 0 2160000 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 15min ES 20 seconds 0 900 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts3c 9c f...

Page 739: ... 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day PJCS PGEN 9600 seconds 0 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day PPJC PDET 5760 count 0 691200000 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day PPJC PGEN 5760 count 0 691200000 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 OC192 XFP pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 Table C 18 OC192 XFP Defau...

Page 740: ...00 LBC LOW LBC LOW 1 LBC LOW 2 255 MRC 12 OC12 PORT physicalthresholds alarm LBC LOW 20 0 1 2 LBC HIGH MRC 12 OC12 PORT physicalthresholds alarm OPR HIGH 200 OPR LOW OPR LOW 1 OPR LOW 2 255 MRC 12 OC12 PORT physicalthresholds alarm OPR LOW 50 1 0 1 OPR HIGH MRC 12 OC12 PORT physicalthresholds alarm OPT HIGH 120 OPT LOW OPT LOW 1 OPT LOW 2 255 MRC 12 OC12 PORT physicalthresholds alarm OPT LOW 80 0 ...

Page 741: ... OC12 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min CV 5315 B2 count 0 552600 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min PSC 1 count 0 600 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min PSC W 1 count 0 600 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 15min PSD 300 sec...

Page 742: ...0000 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts1 farend 1day ES 100 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts1 farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts1 farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts1 farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min CV 15 B3 count 0 2160000 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15m...

Page 743: ... MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts12c farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts12c farend 1day CV 750 B3 count 0 207360000 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts12c farend 1day ES 600 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts12c farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts12c farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts12c far...

Page 744: ...2 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 1day CV 250 B3 count 0 207360000 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 1day ES 200 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds ...

Page 745: ...thresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC3 PORT config line AINSSoakTime 08 00 hours mins 00 00 00 15 00 30 48 00 MRC 12 OC3 PORT config line AlsMode Disabled Disabled Auto Restart Manual Restart Manual Restart for Test MRC 12 OC3 PORT config line AlsRecoveryPulseDuration 2 0 seconds 2 0 2 1 2 2 100 0...

Page 746: ... LBC LOW 2 255 MRC 12 OC3 PORT physicalthresholds warning 15min LBC LOW 20 0 1 2 LBC HIGH MRC 12 OC3 PORT physicalthresholds warning 15min OPR HIGH 200 OPR LOW OPR LOW 1 OPR LOW 2 255 MRC 12 OC3 PORT physicalthresholds warning 15min OPR LOW 50 1 0 1 OPR HIGH MRC 12 OC3 PORT physicalthresholds warning 15min OPT HIGH 120 OPT LOW OPT LOW 1 OPT LOW 2 255 MRC 12 OC3 PORT physicalthresholds warning 15mi...

Page 747: ...nds 0 900 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day CV 13120 B2 count 0 13219200 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day ES 864 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSC 5 count 0 57600 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSD 600 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds line nearen...

Page 748: ...end 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0...

Page 749: ...min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 MRC 12 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min SES 3 sec...

Page 750: ...8 PORT config line sdh SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE TRUE MRC 12 OC48 PORT config line sdh SyncMsgIn TRUE FALSE TRUE MRC 12 OC48 PORT config line SendAISOnFacilityLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE MRC 12 OC48 PORT config line SendAISOnTerminalLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE MRC 12 OC48 PORT config line SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 MRC 12 OC48 PORT config line sonet Send FF DoNotUse FALSE FALSE when SendDoNotUse TRUE ...

Page 751: ...PR HIGH MRC 12 OC48 PORT physicalthresholds warning 1day OPT HIGH 120 OPT LOW OPT LOW 1 OPT LOW 2 255 MRC 12 OC48 PORT physicalthresholds warning 1day OPT LOW 80 0 1 2 OPT HIGH MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min CV 21260 B2 count 0 2212200 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 MRC 12 OC48 PO...

Page 752: ...5 count 0 57600 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSD 600 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSD R 600 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSD S 600 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSD W 600 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day SES 4 seconds 0 86400 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmt...

Page 753: ... sts1 nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day CV 125 B3 count 0 207360000 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day ES 100 sec...

Page 754: ...nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48c nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48c nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48c nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48c nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48...

Page 755: ... 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 MRC 12 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend ...

Page 756: ...8 1E 9 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT config line SendAISOnFacilityLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT config line SendAISOnTerminalLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT config line SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT config line sonet Send FF DoNotUse FALSE FALSE when SendDoNotUse TRUE FALSE TRUE when SendDoNotUse FALSE MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT config line sonet SendDoNotUse FALSE FALSE ...

Page 757: ...RT physicalthresholds warning 1day OPT LOW 80 0 1 2 OPT HIGH MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min CV 5315 B2 count 0 552600 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min SES 1 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min UAS 3 ...

Page 758: ...ORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds section nearend 15min CV 10000 B1 count 0 553500 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds section nearend 15min ES 500 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds section nearend 15min SEFS 500 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds section nearend 15min SES 500 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds s...

Page 759: ...holds sts1 nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day CV 125 B3 count 0 207360000 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend ...

Page 760: ...NPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min NPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts12c nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts12c nearend...

Page 761: ...conds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min CV 25 B3 count 0 2160000 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min ES 20 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 MRC25G 4 OC12 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min NPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000...

Page 762: ...ed Auto Restart Manual Restart Manual Restart for Test MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT config line AlsRecoveryPulseDuration 2 0 seconds 2 0 2 1 2 2 100 0 when AlsMode Disabled Auto Restart Manual Restart 80 0 80 1 80 2 100 0 when AlsMode Manual Restart for Test MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT config line AlsRecoveryPulseInterval 100 seconds 60 300 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT config line PJStsMon 0 STS 0 3 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT config line...

Page 763: ...ay LBC HIGH 200 LBC LOW LBC LOW 1 LBC LOW 2 255 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT physicalthresholds warning 1day LBC LOW 20 0 1 2 LBC HIGH MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT physicalthresholds warning 1day OPR HIGH 200 OPR LOW OPR LOW 1 OPR LOW 2 255 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT physicalthresholds warning 1day OPR LOW 50 1 0 1 OPR HIGH MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT physicalthresholds warning 1day OPT HIGH 120 OPT LOW OPT LOW 1 OPT LOW 2 255 MRC25G 4 O...

Page 764: ... seconds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day SES 4 seconds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds section nearend 15min CV 10000 B1 count 0 138600 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds section nearend 15min ES 500 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds section nearend 15min SEFS 500 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 O...

Page 765: ...onds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 1day CV 125 B3 count 0 207360000 MRC25G 4 OC3 ...

Page 766: ... NPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min NPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PJCDIFF 60 count 0 14400000 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PJCS PDET 100 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC3 PORT pmthresholds sts3c nearend 15min PP...

Page 767: ...l 100 seconds 60 300 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT config line PJStsMon 0 STS 0 48 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT config line SDBER 1 00E 07 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT config line SendAISOnFacilityLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT config line SendAISOnTerminalLoopback TRUE TRUE FALSE MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT config line SFBER 1 00E 04 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT config line sonet Send FF DoNot...

Page 768: ...ning 1day OPR LOW 50 1 0 1 OPR HIGH MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT physicalthresholds warning 1day OPT HIGH 120 OPT LOW OPT LOW 1 OPT LOW 2 255 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT physicalthresholds warning 1day OPT LOW 80 0 1 2 OPT HIGH MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min CV 21260 B2 count 0 2212200 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line farend 15min ES 87 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line farend...

Page 769: ...nd 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSC 5 count 0 57600 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSC R 5 count 0 57600 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSC S 5 count 0 57600 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSC W 5 count 0 57600 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds line nearend 1day PSD 600 seconds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC48...

Page 770: ...PORT pmthresholds sts1 farend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts1 farend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min CV 15 B3 count 0 2160000 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min ES 12 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts1 nearend 15min NPJC ...

Page 771: ... count 0 72 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48c farend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48c farend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48c farend 1day CV 750 B3 count 0 207360000 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48c farend 1day ES 600 seconds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48c farend 1day FC 40 count 0 6912 ...

Page 772: ...00000 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48c nearend 1day SES 7 seconds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts12c 48c nearend 1day UAS 10 seconds 0 86400 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 15min CV 25 B3 count 0 2160000 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 15min ES 20 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c farend 15min FC 10 count 0 72 MRC25G 4 OC48...

Page 773: ...0 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min PJCS PGEN 100 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min PPJC PDET 60 count 0 7200000 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min PPJC PGEN 60 count 0 7200000 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min SES 3 seconds 0 900 MRC25G 4 OC48 PORT pmthresholds sts3c 9c nearend 15min UAS 10 seconds 0 ...

Page 774: ...o ensure that the far end has a chance to respond A detection guard timer is used to ensure the presence of an SF SD condition before switching away from a card A recover guard timer ensures the absence of SF SD prior to switching to a card You can change the default number of seconds before these timers expire by changing the NE default for the corresponding timer to a value within its domain of ...

Page 775: ...ode External Line or Mixed quality of reserved RES timing the rule that defines the order of clock quality from lowest to highest revertive reversion time and SSM message set for node timing Note Any node level defaults changed using the Provisioning Defaults tab changes existing node level provisioning Although this is service affecting it depends on the type of defaults changed for example gener...

Page 776: ... NODE general RaiseConditionOnEmptySlot FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE general ReportLoopbackConditionsOnOOS MTPorts FALSE FALSE TRUE NODE general SDPBER 1 00E 06 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 NODE general TimeZone GMT 08 00 Pacific Time US Canada Tijuana For applicable time zones see Table C 22 on page C 118 NODE general UseDST TRUE TRUE FALSE NODE lmp controlChannel AdminState OOS DSBL D IS OOS DSBLD NODE lmp...

Page 777: ...3 NODE lmp controlChannel MaxHelloDeadInterval 20000 ms maximum_of 20 00 HelloDeadInt erval sum_of Ma xHelloInterval 1 maximum_of 20 00 HelloDeadInt erval sum_of Ma xHelloInterval 1 1 maximum_of 20 00 HelloDeadInt erval sum_of Ma xHelloInterval 1 2 20000 NODE lmp controlChannel MaxHelloInterval 2000 ms maximum_of 30 0 HelloInterval maximum_of 30 0 HelloInterval 1 maximum_of 30 0 HelloInterval 2 mi...

Page 778: ...ort Component NODE lmp general Allowed TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE lmp general Enabled FALSE FALSE TRUE when Allowed TRUE FALSE when Allowed FALSE NODE lmp general LMP WDM TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE lmp general Role OLS PEER OLS NODE lmp teLink AdminState OOS DSBL D IS OOS DSBLD NODE lmp teLink DWDM TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE lmp teLink MuxCapability Lambda Switch Packet Switch Level 1 Packet Switch Level 2 Packet S...

Page 779: ...2 1500 NODE osi mainSetup L1LSPBufferSize 512 bytes 512 1500 NODE osi mainSetup NodeRoutingMode Intermediate System Level 1 End System Intermediate System Level 1 Intermediate System Level 1 Level 2 NODE osi subnet DISPriority 63 1 2 3 127 NODE osi subnet ESH 10 sec 10 20 30 1000 NODE osi subnet GCCISISCost 60 1 2 3 63 NODE osi subnet IIH 3 sec 1 2 3 600 NODE osi subnet ISH 10 sec 10 20 30 1000 NO...

Page 780: ... 54 0 NODE protection 1 1 BidirectionalSwitching FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE protection 1 1 DetectionGuardTimer 1 seconds 0 0 05 0 1 0 5 1 2 3 4 5 NODE protection 1 1 RecoveryGuardTimer 1 seconds 0 0 05 0 1 10 NODE protection 1 1 ReversionTime 5 0 minutes 0 5 1 0 1 5 12 0 NODE protection 1 1 Revertive FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE protection 1 1 VerifyGuardTimer 0 5 seconds 0 5 1 NODE protection blsr RingRevers...

Page 781: ...DefaultTCCEthernetIPNetmask 24 bits 8 9 10 32 NODE security dataComm isSecureModeSupportedOnControlCard TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE security dataComm LcdBackplaneIpSetting Display Only Allow Configuration Display Only Suppress Display when isSecureModeSu pportedOnContro lCard TRUE NOT SUPPORTED when isSecureModeSu pportedOnContro lCard FALSE NODE security dataComm SecureModeLocked FALSE FALSE TRUE when i...

Page 782: ...ing Provisioning Superuser NODE security grantPermission RestoreDB Superuser Provisioning Superuser NODE security grantPermission RetrieveAuditLog Superuser Provisioning Superuser NODE security idleUserTimeout Maintenance 01 00 hours mins 00 00 00 01 00 02 16 39 NODE security idleUserTimeout Provisioning 00 30 hours mins 00 00 00 01 00 02 16 39 NODE security idleUserTimeout Retrieve 00 00 hours mi...

Page 783: ...erUser FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE security passwordAging EnforcePasswordAging FALSE TRUE FALSE NODE security passwordAging maintenance AgingPeriod 45 days 20 90 NODE security passwordAging maintenance WarningPeriod 5 days 2 20 NODE security passwordAging provisioning AgingPeriod 45 days 20 90 NODE security passwordAging provisioning WarningPeriod 5 days 2 20 NODE security passwordAging retrieve AgingPe...

Page 784: ...NODE security passwordComplexity ReverseUserIdAllowed TRUE TRUE FALSE NODE security radiusServer AccountingPort 1813 port 0 32767 NODE security radiusServer AuthenticationPort 1812 port 0 32767 NODE security radiusServer EnableNodeAsFinalAuthenticator TRUE FALSE TRUE NODE security serialCraftAccess EnableCraftPort TRUE TRUE FALSE NODE security shellAccess AccessState NonSecure Disabled NonSecure S...

Page 785: ...eneral SSMM essageSet Generation 1 PRS STU ST2 TNC ST3E ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when general SSMM essageSet Generation 2 G811 STU G812T G812L SETS DUS when general SSMM essageSet N A NODE timing bits 1 AISThreshold SMC PRS STU ST2 ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when general SSMM essageSet Generation 1 PRS STU ST2 TNC ST3E ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when general SSMM essageSet Generation 2 G811 STU G812T G812L SETS DUS ...

Page 786: ...odingOut B8ZS B8ZS AMI when FacilityTypeOut DS1 HDB3 AMI when FacilityTypeOut E1 N A when FacilityTypeOut 2MHz AMI when FacilityTypeOut 6MHz NODE timing bits 1 FacilityType DS1 DS1 64kHz 8kHz when general Timing Standard SONET E1 64kHz 8kHz 2MHz when general Timing Standard SDH NODE timing bits 1 FacilityTypeOut DS1 DS1 6MHz when general Timing Standard SONET E1 6MHz 2MHz when general Timing Stand...

Page 787: ...n FacilityTypeOut DS1 FAS CRC FAS CAS FAS CAS CRC FAS Unframed when FacilityTypeOut E1 N A when FacilityTypeOut 2MHz N A when FacilityTypeOut 6MHz NODE timing bits 1 LBO 0 133 0 133 134 266 267 399 400 533 534 655 NODE timing bits 1 SaBit N A N A when FacilityType DS1 4 5 6 7 8 when FacilityType E1 N A when FacilityType 2MHz N A when FacilityType 64kHz 8kHz NODE timing bits 1 State OOS DSBL D IS O...

Page 788: ...SETS DUS when general SSMM essageSet N A NODE timing bits 2 AISThreshold SMC PRS STU ST2 ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when general SSMM essageSet Generation 1 PRS STU ST2 TNC ST3E ST3 SMC ST4 DUS RES when general SSMM essageSet Generation 2 G811 STU G812T G812L SETS DUS when general SSMM essageSet N A NODE timing bits 2 Coding B8ZS B8ZS AMI when FacilityType DS1 HDB3 AMI when FacilityType E1 N A when Facil...

Page 789: ...yType DS1 DS1 64kHz 8kHz when general Timing Standard SONET E1 64kHz 8kHz 2MHz when general Timing Standard SDH NODE timing bits 2 FacilityTypeOut DS1 DS1 6MHz when general Timing Standard SONET E1 6MHz 2MHz when general Timing Standard SDH NODE timing bits 2 Framing ESF ESF D4 when FacilityType DS1 FAS CRC FAS CAS FAS CAS CRC FAS Unframed when FacilityType E1 N A when FacilityType 2MHz N A when F...

Page 790: ... N A when FacilityTypeOut 6MHz NODE timing bits 2 LBO 0 133 0 133 134 266 267 399 400 533 534 655 NODE timing bits 2 SaBit N A N A when FacilityType DS1 4 5 6 7 8 when FacilityType E1 N A when FacilityType 2MHz N A when FacilityType 64kHz 8kHz NODE timing bits 2 State OOS DSBL D IS OOS DSBLD NODE timing bits 2 StateOut OOS DSBL D IS OOS DSBLD NODE timing general Mode Line External Line Mixed Table...

Page 791: ...ST2 RES STU ST3 RES ST2 SMC RES ST3 ST4 RES SMC RES ST4 RES DUS when SSMMessageSet Generation 1 PRS RES STU RES PRS ST2 RES STU TNC RES ST2 ST3E RES TN C ST3 RES ST3E SMC RES ST3 ST4 RES SMC RES ST4 RES DUS when SSMMessageSet Generation 2 N A when SSMMessageSet N A NODE timing general ReversionTime 5 0 minutes 0 5 1 0 1 5 12 0 NODE timing general Revertive TRUE TRUE FALSE NODE timing general SSMMe...

Page 792: ...aracas La Paz San Juan GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Atlantic Time Canada Halifax Saint John Charlottetown GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Santiago GMT 04 00 GMT 04 00 Thule Qaanaaq GMT 03 30 GMT 03 30 St John s Newfoundland GMT 03 00 GMT 03 00 Brasilia Rio de Janeiro Sao Paulo GMT 03 00 GMT 03 00 Buenos Aires Georgetown GMT 03 00 GMT 03 00 Godthab Nuuk Greenland GMT 02 00 GMT 02 00 Mid Atlantic GMT 01 00 GMT 01 00 Azo...

Page 793: ...l GMT 05 00 GMT 05 00 Chelyabinsk Prem Yekaterinburg Ufa GMT 05 00 GMT 05 00 Islamabad Karachi Tashkent GMT 05 30 GMT 05 30 Calcutta Mumbai New Delhi Chennai GMT 05 45 GMT 05 45 Kathmandu GMT 06 00 GMT 06 00 Almaty GMT 06 00 GMT 06 00 Colombo Dhaka Astana GMT 06 00 GMT 06 00 Novosibirsk Omsk GMT 06 30 GMT 06 30 Cocos Rangoon GMT 07 00 GMT 07 00 Bangkok Hanoi Jakarta GMT 07 00 GMT 07 00 Krasnoyarsk...

Page 794: ...ctable and is not checked during circuit creation the following automatic routing suboptions are also unavailable Using Required Nodes Spans Review Route Before Creation and VT DS3 Mapped Conversion Create TL1 like Set whether to create only TL1 like circuits that is instruct the node to create only cross connects allowing the resulting circuits to be in an upgradable state Network Map Set the def...

Page 795: ...ed You can provision this setting in the CTC Preferences page Table C 23 CTC Default Settings Default Name Default Value Default Domain CTC circuits CreateLikeTL1 FALSE TRUE FALSE CTC circuits RouteAutomatically TRUE TRUE FALSE CTC circuits RouteAutomaticallyDefaultOverridable TRUE TRUE FALSE CTC network Map United States none Germany Japan Netherlands South Korea United Kingdom United States ...

Page 796: ...C 122 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 Appendix C Network Element Defaults C 4 CTC Default Settings ...

Page 797: ...70 add drop multiplexer See linear ADM administrative states automatic alarm suppression 14 3 B 3 description B 2 AEP AIC I compatibility 2 28 cross connect card compatibility 2 4 description 1 56 I Temp A 10 power requirements A 8 software compatibility 2 3 specifications A 16 AIC card software compatibility 2 3 AIC I card card level LEDs 2 29 cross connect card compatibility 2 3 description 2 28...

Page 798: ...ruser privileges to Provisioning users 9 6 audit trail capacities 9 9 description 9 8 log entries 9 8 automatic protection switching XC10G card switch matrix 2 20 XCVT card switch matrix 2 16 XC VXC 10G card switch matrix 2 23 B backplane connections AEP connections 1 58 alarm contacts 1 69 AMP Champ 1 31 backplane pin field 1 67 BNC 1 19 LAN connections 1 70 MiniBNC 1 24 timing connections 1 70 T...

Page 799: ... and removal tool 1 20 description 1 18 bridge and roll 11 40 C C2 byte 11 25 cables CAT 5 LAN 1 53 8 6 8 7 coaxial See coaxial cable DS 1 See DS 1 cables Ethernet 1 51 fiber management standard 1 54 fiber management tie down bar 1 55 routing 1 53 UBIC V See UBIC V cables card protection See also 1 1 optical port protection See also 1 1 optimized optical protection See also 1 1 electrical card pro...

Page 800: ...Utilization window 15 48 See also individual cards indexed by name CGV parameter 15 5 changing alarm profiles 14 10 alarm severities 14 9 display of conditions 14 6 security policies 9 6 circuits attributes 11 2 automatic routing 11 27 autorange 11 2 constraint based routing 11 33 exporting 11 3 11 10 filtering 11 3 finding circuits with alarms 14 5 manual routing detail 11 29 maximize resources 1...

Page 801: ...e 16 18 rows in RMON historyControlTable 16 19 rows in RMON mediaIndependentTable 16 17 cross connect service state transitions B 5 to B 10 CSS parameter 15 5 CSS P parameter 15 5 CTC autodiscovery of newer software releases 8 3 compatibility 1 76 computer requirements 8 4 concurrent session limit 8 4 default settings C 120 delivery methods 8 1 exporting data 8 17 Launcher 8 18 legal disclaimer 8 ...

Page 802: ... drops multiple drops 11 18 secondary sources and drops 11 28 service state requirements for drop ports 11 8 DS1 E1 56 card card level LEDs 3 12 description 3 10 factory defaults C 7 illustration 3 11 performance monitoring 15 14 15 29 port status 3 13 slot compatibility 3 11 specifications A 19 UBIC H EIA J labeling 1 36 See also electrical cards See also UBIC H EIA See also UBIC V EIA DS1 14 car...

Page 803: ...16 slot compatibility 3 14 specifications A 21 See also electrical cards DS3 12E card card level LEDs 3 24 card protection 3 22 description 3 21 EIA compatibility 1 16 1 17 factory defaults C 19 illustration 3 23 performance monitoring 15 19 port status 3 25 slot compatibility 3 22 specifications A 24 See also electrical cards DS3 CV L parameter 15 5 DS3i N 12 card card level LEDs 3 21 description...

Page 804: ...formance monitoring 15 23 port status 3 27 slot compatibility 3 25 specifications A 26 traffic mapping 3 26 XC10G card support 2 22 XCVT card support 2 18 3 26 XC VXC 10G card support 2 27 See also electrical cards DSBLD secondary state definition B 2 DS N cards See electrical cards dual GNEs 13 18 dual IP addresses See secure mode dual ring interconnect See DRI DWDM GBICs 5 36 OC48 ELR STM16 EH 1...

Page 805: ...n 1 15 installation overview 1 16 replacement 1 38 shelf assembly compatibility 1 16 specifications A 3 See also AMP Champ EIA See also BNC EIA See also high density BNC EIA See also MiniBNC EIA See also SMB EIA See also UBIC H EIA See also UBIC V EIA EIA TIA 232 1 71 2 12 electrical cards cross connect card compatibility 2 4 EIA requirement 1 2 overview 3 2 path trace capability 11 25 performance...

Page 806: ...group 16 20 RMON statistics 16 18 See also Ethernet cards Ethernet cards cross connect card compatibility 2 5 factory defaults C 33 overview 5 2 path trace capability 11 25 performance monitoring 15 29 power requirements A 9 service disruption 1 15 software compatibility 5 3 specifications A 48 temperature range A 12 See also CE 1000 4 card See also CE 100T 8 card See also CE MR 10 card See also E...

Page 807: ... on a CE Series card VCAT circuit 11 35 static routes 13 7 TCA raised on electrical ports 15 2 three node linear ADM 12 31 traditional BLSR DRI with opposite side routing 12 21 traditional BLSR DRI with same side routing 12 20 traditional drop and continue path protection DRI 12 23 traffic pattern on a two fiber BLSR 12 5 two BLSRs shared by one node 12 30 two fiber BLSR 12 3 two fiber BLSR fiber ...

Page 808: ... 5 firewall external 13 25 filtering packets 13 17 firewall proxy with SNMP 16 16 tunnel 13 27 flange 1 6 FLT secondary state definition B 2 Force switch See external switching commands four fiber BLSR See BLSR front door equipment access 1 6 ground strap 1 9 label 1 10 removing 1 10 FT TD 13 41 fuse and alarm panel 1 2 1 6 FX interface 5 18 G G1K 4 card cross connect compatibility 5 15 descriptio...

Page 809: ...ertion and removal tool 1 20 high density cards card protection by EIA type 7 8 7 11 card protection description 7 5 See also DS1 E1 56 card See also DS3 EC1 48 card high density shelf AIP 1 14 EIA compatibility 1 17 fan tray assembly 1 63 requirements 1 3 sheet metal cover 1 12 See also high density cards high level data link control 13 30 history CE Series Ethernet card performance monitoring 15...

Page 810: ...3 default gateway on CTC workstation 13 6 dual GNEs on a subnet 13 18 IP addressing with secure mode enabled 13 20 OSPF 13 10 Proxy ARP and gateway 13 4 static routes connecting to LANs 13 7 IPC parameter 15 7 IP encapsulated tunnel 11 18 IP over CLNS tunnels description 13 43 GNE as endpoint example 13 53 provisioning in CTC and Cisco IOS 13 44 similarity to TL1 tunnels 8 18 tunneling from an ONS...

Page 811: ...eter 15 8 lower backplane cover See backplane covers LPBK secondary state definition B 2 LSP 13 35 M MAC address AIP 1 14 proxy ARP 13 4 retrieve table 9 4 Maintenance user 9 1 management information base See MIBs Manual switch See external switching commands maximum transmission unit 13 31 MEA secondary state definition B 2 merging circuits 11 46 MIBs generic threshold and performance monitoring ...

Page 812: ... 37 RPR Span window 15 38 soak timer 11 9 VCAT circuits 11 34 modem interface A 2 modifying See changing modules See cards See SFPs monitor circuits 11 18 monitoring 64 bit RMON over DCC 16 17 circuits 11 18 power 2 32 traffic 11 24 mounting bracket reversible 1 4 mounting the shelf assembly 1 5 MRC 12 card description 4 41 factory defaults C 65 illustration 4 42 J0 section trace 11 24 LEDs 4 45 m...

Page 813: ...node view card colors 8 9 creating users 9 1 port colors 8 10 security level by tab 9 2 tabs list 8 11 viewing popup information 8 11 NPJC PDET parameter 15 8 NPJC Pdet parameter 15 4 NPJC PDET P parameter 15 8 NPJC Pgen parameter 15 4 NPJC PGEN P parameter 15 8 NSAP address fields 13 32 in virtual OSI routers 13 42 manually link to TIDs 13 40 TARP translation 13 37 used by CLNP to identify networ...

Page 814: ... 36 4 37 description 4 33 factory defaults C 54 LEDs 4 38 performance monitoring 15 50 port status 4 38 slot compatibility 4 37 specifications A 41 topologies 4 37 See also optical cards OC192 LR STM64 LH ITU 15xx xx card description 4 38 factory defaults C 54 illustration 4 39 LEDs 4 40 performance monitoring 15 50 port status 4 41 slot compatibility 4 40 specifications A 42 topologies 4 40 See a...

Page 815: ... slot compatibility 4 26 specifications A 37 topologies 4 26 See also optical cards OC48 ELR 200 GHz cards description 4 27 factory defaults C 49 illustration 4 28 LEDs 4 29 performance monitoring 15 50 port status 4 29 slot compatibility 4 28 specifications A 38 topologies 4 28 See also optical cards OC48 IR STM16 SH AS 1310 card description 4 21 factory defaults C 49 illustration 4 22 LEDs 4 22 ...

Page 816: ... terminating cards 15 3 network element defaults C 34 to C 99 overview 4 2 path trace capability 11 25 performance monitoring 15 48 ports line rates and connectors 1 74 power requirements A 9 product names A 11 protection See 1 1 optical port protection and optimized 1 1 optical protection software compatibility 4 5 specifications A 27 temperature ranges A 11 timing 10 1 upgrading to a higher rate...

Page 817: ...ents See backplane connections ping 13 2 pinned hex key 1 8 PJCDIFF P parameter 15 8 PJCS PDET P parameter 15 9 PJCS PGEN P parameter 15 9 PJNEG parameter See NPJC PDET parameter PJPOS parameter See PPJC PDET parameter pluggable device See PPMs See SFPs See XFPs pluggable port modules See PPMs pointer justification counts 15 4 point to point See linear ADM point to point protocol 13 30 popup data ...

Page 818: ...utes 13 5 proxy tunnel 13 27 PSC parameter 15 9 PSC R parameter 15 9 PSC S parameter 15 9 PSC W parameter 15 9 PSD parameter 15 9 PSD R parameter 15 10 PSD S parameter 15 10 PST B 1 PSTQ B 1 R rack installation bay assembly 1 6 multiple nodes 1 6 overview 1 3 single node 1 5 rack size 1 2 RADIUS authentication 9 9 shared secrets 9 10 RAM requirements 8 5 rear cover See backplane covers reconfigure...

Page 819: ...tion in cMediaIndependentHistoryControlTable 16 18 row creation in etherStatsTable 16 18 row creation in historyControlTable 16 19 row creation in mediaIndependentTable 16 17 row deletion in alarmTable 16 22 row deletion in etherStatsTable 16 19 row deletion in historyControlTable 16 20 supported OIDs in the alarmTable 16 21 roll automatic 11 41 dual 11 43 manual 11 41 one cross connection 11 43 p...

Page 820: ...transitions B 5 See also administrative states SESCP PFE parameter 15 10 SESCP P parameter 15 10 SES L parameter 15 10 SES PFE parameter 15 10 SES PM parameter 15 10 SES P parameter 15 10 SESP P parameter 15 10 SESR PM parameter 15 11 SESR SM parameter 15 11 SES SM parameter 15 11 SES S parameter 15 10 SES V parameter 15 11 SFPs compatibility by card 4 52 description 4 54 5 38 Ethernet cards 5 33 ...

Page 821: ...es See service states static routes common scenario 13 2 connecting to LANs 13 7 storage access networking cards See FC_MR 4 card string 11 24 STS CTC matrices 11 15 ML Series card capacity 5 17 5 19 squelch table 11 22 STS 24c restriction with G1K 4 card 5 15 time slot assignments 11 4 XC10G switch matrix 2 20 XCVT switch matrix 2 16 XC VXC 10G switch matrix 2 23 subnet CTC and nodes on different...

Page 822: ...ant installation process 2 8 reset service disruption 1 15 slot compatibility 2 8 soft reset 8 21 software 8 1 software compatibility 2 3 specifications A 12 temperature ranges A 10 TCC2P card behavior when secure mode is enabled 13 21 card level LEDs 2 14 craft interface A 2 cross connect card compatibility 2 3 database description 8 21 DCC termination 2 11 description 2 10 EIA TIA 232 port 1 71 ...

Page 823: ...escription 12 38 node addition or removal 12 41 path protection to two fiber BLSR 12 40 point to point or linear ADM to two fiber BLSR 12 40 two fiber to four fiber BLSR 12 41 unprotected point to point or linear ADM to path protection 12 39 traffic monitoring 11 24 traffic routing 13 24 transmission timers 13 31 transmux card See DS3XM 12 card See DS3XM 6 card traps content 16 9 IETF generic 16 9...

Page 824: ... controls V VAP definition 11 23 merged circuits 11 46 VCAT circuits add or delete member 11 37 circuit states 11 34 common fiber routing 11 34 description 11 34 differential delay on the CE 1000 4 5 29 differential delay on the FC_MR 4 card 6 2 in service topology upgrade support 12 39 member routing 11 34 non LCAS VCAT circuits 11 36 server trail support 11 48 sizes 11 3 split routing 11 34 supp...

Page 825: ...ty 2 3 XCVT card bandwidth 11 12 card level LEDs 2 18 compatibility limitations 2 23 cross connect matrix 2 17 description 2 15 functionality 2 16 hardware compatibility 1 76 power requirements A 8 slot compatibility 2 17 software compatibility 2 3 specifications A 14 temperature range A 10 VT mapping 2 17 XC VXC 10G card bandwidth 11 12 card level LEDs 2 27 compatibility with other cards 2 28 cro...

Page 826: ...Index IN 30 Cisco ONS 15454 Reference Manual R8 5 78 18106 01 ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for 15454-DS1-14= - 1.544Mbps Expansion Module

Brand: yellow jacket Pages: 16

SmarTerminal SmartNL-RF2000

Brand: sammi Pages: 23

Brand: SentrySafe Pages: 48

28G Nano-Cube WIFI

Brand: JBJ Pages: 24

Brand: Keithley Pages: 71

Brand: Dometic Pages: 12

TWN4 CONFIG PROGRAMMER

Brand: Elatec Pages: 7

Brand: Hendrickson Pages: 24

Brand: Honeywell Pages: 3

Brand: Honeywell Pages: 2

Brand: Ikegami Pages: 48

Brand: Avanti Pages: 20

Brand: MadgeTech Pages: 2

Brand: MadgeTech Pages: 2

Brand: MadgeTech Pages: 2

Brand: MadgeTech Pages: 2

Brand: Meinberg Pages: 168

Brand: S-RFID Pages: 10

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands